You are on page 1of 393

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Kongsberg

FINAL DRAWING
K-Gauge GL-300
Tank Gauging System

HMD H2547

KMA project Ref.: i034739


KMA project no.: 673807933

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Haakon VII gate 4
N-7041 Trondheim Norway
Phone:+ 4773581000 Fax:+ 4773581001
Sales OfficeHorten:
P.O.Box 1009,N-3194 Horten, Norway.
Phone + 47 33 20 00 Fax: +47 33 04 22 50

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Trondheim

System drawings

Radar

Pressure

Temperature

DPU

Cargo - Cabinet

Uninterupted
Power Supplies UPS

Manuals

Kongsberg Maritime AS N-7005 Trondheim,


Norway.
Haakon VII gate 4
Phone: +47 815 73 700 and
+47 815 35 355
Fax:
+47 85 02 80 82
E-mail: km.support@kongsberg.com
Web:
http://www.km.kongsberg.com

Classification
approvals

Sales office:
Kirkegrdsveien 45
P.O. Box 483
NO-3601 Kongsberg
Norway.
Phone: +47 32 28 50 00
Fax:
+47 33 28 50 10
E-mail: km.sales@kongsberg.com

Ex-certificates

10

FINAL
DRAWING
System:
K-Gauge GL-300
Tank Gauging System
Yard & Newbuilding:
Hyundai Mipo Dockyard
Co,.Ltd H2547
Ship name:
TRF MANDAL
Classification society:
LR
KMA hull ref. no:
i034739
KMA project no:
673807933
KMA project resp.:
KMK project resp.:
H. C. Ku

PROJECT INFORMATION :
CUSTOMER

: HMD

SHIP OWNER

: NAVIG8

HULL NO.

: H2547

SHIP KIND

: 37K PRODUCT TANKER

SHIP YARD

: HYUNDAI MIPO DOCKYARD CO., LTD.

CLASS

: LR

DATE

MARK

2013.12.24

P1

2014.05.03

2014.07.09
2015.01.25
2015.02.12
2015.02.12
2015.03.31
2015.03.31
2015.04.13
2015.05.12
2015.05.12
2015.06.24
2015.06.24
2015.07.21
2015.08.12
2015.08.13
2015.09.11
2015.09.15
2015.10.19
2015.11.18

KM Korea Ltd.

P2

DESCRIPTION

Issued for Approval


-Making the drawing based on shipyard's POS, KMK
Qoutation..

Modification
-. Signal for W.B Tank in System configuration is
removed by shipyard's comment
-. Sensor connection list updated with above
accordingly.
-. Requested information sheet & Scope of supply
updated.
Issued for Working
Issued for HMD 2511 Final
Issued for HMD 2512 Final
Issued for HMD 2513 Final
Issued for HMD 2514 Final
Issued for HMD 2515 Final
Issued for HMD 2516 Final
Issued for HMD 2517 Final
Issued for HMD 2522 Final
Issued for HMD 2519 Final
Issued for HMD 2520 Final
Issued for HMD 2541 Final
Issued for HMD 2544 Final
Issued for HMD 2521 Final
Issued for HMD 2542 Final
Issued for HMD 2543 Final
Issued for HMD 2545 Final
Issued for HMD 2547 Final

DESIGN CHECK APPR.


GSS
HCK
DJS

GSS

HCK

DJS

GSS
GSS
GSS
GSS
GSS
GSS
GSS
GSS
GSS
GSS
GSS
GSS
GSS
GSS
GSS
GSS
GSS
GSS

HCK
HCK
HCK
HCK
HCK
HCK
HCK
HCK
HCK
HCK
HCK
HCK
HCK
HCK
HCK
HCK
HCK
HCK

DJS
DJS
DJS
DJS
DJS
DJS
DJS
DJS
DJS
DJS
DJS
DJS
DJS
DJS
DJS
DJS
DJS
DJS

K-Gauge

Drawing

Rev Proj dwg Rev

Chapter 1 - System drawings


K-Gauge GL-300, system configuration.
Cable List KM Merchant Marine
Safety control drawing and electrical connection of GL-300, system layout
Electrical connection diagram for GLH-300 and GCB-300, system layout
K-Gauge CLS system, scope of supply list

357834
GL-2513
GL-2641

G
C
B

Scope of supply
Sensor
connection list
Fuse list
Requested
Information
Spare part list
313545

GLA-300
GLA-300/P series types ordering code information and main dimension
JIS B2220 5K 200 full face gasket for GLA-300 socket, dimensional sketch
Installation of GLA-300/P on tank socket, installation drawing
RTG location and free space requirements, installation drawing

GL-2661
UY-149
GL-2630
357752

F
C
B
B

Socket drawing
Socket type GL-2522 for GLA-300, dimensional sketch

GL-2522

GL-2606

GL-2620

GL-2621

GL-1389
UP-663
UP-539
GL-1387
UP-532

E
D
C
C
C

UP-818

GT-2090

GT-1312

GT-2047

UG-917

K-Gauge CLS system, sensor connection list and tank name overview
K-Gauge CLS system, cabinet fuse overview
K-Gauge CLS system, tank monitoring request information sheet
K-Gauge CLS system, spare part list
K-Chief 500 Tank tables and data from customer
Chapter 2 - Radar

For installation with flex. prot tubes


Inst. utilizing prot. hose on radar tank gauge for cable 8-15 and 12.5-20.5
and 17.0-25.5, assembly drawing
GLA-300 prot.hose dim. GLA-300 housing with 2 M32 inlets GL-1389 1 1/4"
hose on main cable, GL-1387 3/4" hose on temp. cable, installation drawing
GLA-300 prot.hose dim. GLA-300 housing with 2 M32 inlets GL-1389 1 1/4"
hose on main cable, GL-1387 3/4" hose on temp. cable, installation drawing
Flexible protection tube GL-1389/-, 1 1/4" BSP, dimensional drawing
Flange JIS 5K-50A with adapter ISO228-G1 1/4A, detail drawing
Flange JIS 5K-40A with adapter ISO228-G1 1/4A, detail drawing
Flexible protection tube GL-1387/-, 3/4" BSP, dimensional drawing
Flange JIS 5K-40A with adapter ISO228-G 3/4A, detail drawing
Common radar installation drawings
Mounting order for inserting cable through the cable gland, inst. Dwg
Chapter 3 - Pressure
Atmospheric pressure measurement
Indoor mounting
Pressure transmitter, mounted indoor with atmospheric pressure pipe, system
layout
Pressure transmitter type GT402, dimensional sketch
Ballast pump discharge line pressure measurement
Ballast pump suction/discharge line, submerged, system layout
Connection box for level and pressure measurement. Top mouted installation,
IP67, JIS 65 5K interface, dimensional sketch

1299164

1299165

1299166

1299167

1299169

1299170

Pressure transmitter type GT-403, dimensional sketch


Shock absorber, detail drawing
Installation of shock absorber GT-1244/3 for transmitter type GT402...D and
GT403...D in ballast pump suction/discharge systems, installation drawing
Flange with PUR-cable, type GT-1504/-, for pressure transmitters GT-403-,
dimensional sketch
Cable and screen connection for connection box UG-917, installation drawing
Installation instructions for GT402 and GT403

GT-1313
GT-1244

H
D

GT-1455

GT-1504

359481
E-2709

C
A

For installation with flex. prot tubes


Installation utilizing Protection Hose for cable 8~15mm
Protection hose adapter type GL-2519 for GL-1387
Flexible protection tube GL-1387/-, 3/4" BSP, dimensional drawing
Flange JIS 5K-40A with adapter ISO228-G 3/4A, detail drawing

GL-2626
GL-2519
GL-1387
UP-532

A
B
C
C

Cargo manifold line pressure measurement


Pressure transmitter GT404 mounted on cargo line, system layout

GT-2040

Pressure transmitter GT404 installed on cargo line or similar, installation dwg.

GT-1230

Flange type GT-325, dimensional sketch


Protection type GT-740, dimensional sketch
Pressure transmitter type GT404, dimensional sketch

GT-325
GT-740
GT-1314

Q
B
F

N2 Gas main line pressure measurement


Pressure transmitter GT402 mounted on vapour line, system layout

GT-2045

Pressure transmitter GT402 installed on flange installation and replacement.

GT-1227

Flange type GT-769, dimensional sketch


Protection type GT-740, dimensional sketch
Pressure transmitter type GT402, dimensional sketch
Installation instructions for GT402 and GT403

GT-769
GT-740
GT-1312
E-2709

B
B
G
A

N2 Gas line pressure measurement for Residual Tank


GT402, I.G pressure transmitter Residual Tank, installation drawing
Pressure transmitter type GT402, dimensional sketch
Adaptor unit type UP-448 for pressure transmitter on tank adapter

BL071
GT-1312
UP-448

A
G
D

GC-218
GC-222
GC-224
UY-148
MN-1535

H
D
A
B
S

GC-224
MN-1535

A
S

GC-223

GC-218
UY-148

H
B

MN-4567

353163

Chapter 4 - Temperature
GC-300 tank temp. for Framo inst. for Cargo & Slop Tank
Temperature transmitter box GC-300, dimensional sketch
Inst. of GC-300 conn. box with temp. sensors, Framo pump inst., inst. dwg.
Cable preparation GC-300, installation dwg.
Gasket type UY-148 for temperature sensor unit GC-300, detail dwg.
Temperature sensor for oil and gas tanks measuring cable, dim. sketch
GC-300 tank temp. for Deck inst. for Residual Tank
Cable preparation GC-300, installation dwg
Temperature sensor for oil and gas tanks measuring cable, dim. sketch
Installation of GC-300-K connection box with temperature sensors,
installation dwg.
Temperature transmitter box GC-300, dimensional sketch
Gasket type UY-148 for temperature sensor unit GC-300, detail dwg.
Adapter and protection pipe for temp. sensor type MN-1535 GC-300,
installation drawing
Adapter for GC-300, JIS25A pipe, detail drawing
For installation with flex. prot tubes

Installation utilizing Protection Hose for cable 8~15mm


Protection hose adapter type GL-2519 for GL-1387
Flexible protection tube GL-1387/-, 3/4" BSP, dimensional drawing
Flange JIS 5K-40A with adapter ISO228-G 3/4A, detail drawing

GL-2626
GL-2519
GL-1387
UP-532

A
B
C
C

341712
336081
341707
339779
355509

F
A1
B
D2
A

364414

364416

HA452722

350012
350006

E
B

Chapter 5 - Distributed Processing Units - DPU


DPUxe - ATEX / EX(i) interface, connection
RAi-16xe, Outline
RAi-16xe, Sensor Connection
SCU, outline
SCU, Termination list, Connection diagram
Chapter 6 - Cabinets
GL-300 Cargo tank level gauging cabinets
GLN-300/24 Cargo Level System, cabinet for max 24 GLK's, with touch screen
computer, dimensional sketch
GLN-300/24 Cargo Level System, mounting plate inside cabinet for max. 24
GL-300 cabinet for max. 24 SPU's, internal connection diagram
GL-300 UPS and fuse distribution drawing, power distribution
DPUs in cabinet, Internal Connection
13.3" IPC Touch screen Computer
13" IPC, Touch Screen Computer, outline
AIPC, AIPC-XXL, IPC & IPC KCC, connection
Serial Interface
Modbus protocol list
Chapter 7 - Uninterrupted Power Supplies - UPS
Eaton 9130-M 3kVA, 230VAC/230VAC, outline

334381

gl300in_dm
gl300_fe
385541
gl300_de

D
G
B
E

Chapter 8 - Manuals
GL-300, installation guide
GL-300, users manual
Kongsberg K-Gauge CLS Cargo Level System, operator manual
GL-300, installation manual
Chapter 9 - Classification approvals
Type approval cert'
KR Type approval Cert'

OSL04968AC005

Chapter 10 - Ex-certificates
GLA-300. Tank radar sensor
GLK-300. Radar processor unit
MN-1535. Temperature sensor
GT400 Series Pressure transmitter
GC-300 Temperature transmitter
DZ-110 Active safety barrier

09ATEX1132X
09ATEX1128X
82.004X
02ATEX119X
09ATEX1133
EX98D216

1299171
1299172

A
A

1337359

CHAPTER 1

System Configuration

CABLE LIST, KM MERCHANT MARINE

CABLE
NAME
W006
W006
W007
W008
W010
W011
W012
W015
W016
W017
W019
W024
W024
W024
W024
W024
W024
W025
W025
W025
W025
W025
W025
W028
W029
W030
W033
W033
W050
W050
W060
W061
W062
W063
W064
W065
W066
W071
W072
W081
W083
W082
W090

FROM
UNIT NAME
INPUT/CRP, X4 (USB A)
USB OS, TCP
INPUT/CRP, X2
EATON 9130-M, Battery Connector
SOCKET WALL - MALE
SCU A, A1
SCU A, B1
MOUSE EXT CABLE
KEYBOARD EXT. CABLE
PC, VGA
ACP, P6
PC n0. 1, NET A
PC no. 1, NET A
PC no. 1, CAN NET
PC no. 1, NET C
SWITCH A
SWITCH A
PC no. 2, NET B
PC no. 2, NET B
PC no. 2, CAN NET
PC no. 2, NET C
SWITCH B
SWITCH B
PC,Display
DVI cable convertion
PC, CRP (USB A)
PC, COM
PC, COM
PC, USB
PC, USB
LTU, X1
ESS, X4
LTU/ACP
ESS, X1
LEVER, P1
ESS DSUB PLUG, P1
ESS, X1/P4
MANUAL LEVER, J1
MANUAL LEVER, J2
RPMD BOX, DPU, X1
RPMD BOX, DPU, X1
RPMD BOX, DPU, X1
CONNECTION BOX UG-920, FORK 1/2

Doc no: 357834G CO15940

TO
TERM
PLUG
PLUG
SCREW
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
SCREW
PLUG
SCREW
PLUG
PLUG
PL/SCR.
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG

UNIT NAME

TERM

ALC, X3 (USB B)
TCP, X3 (USB B)
TCP, X2
EATON Battery Pack, Battery Connector
SOCKET CONSUMER - FEMALE
SCU B, A2
SCU B, B2

TCP, VGA
OPU, P1
PC no. 1, NET A
SWITCH A
SCU A, ETH2
TOS, U20
PRINTER A
GLK-300, P1
PC no. 2, NET B
SWITCH B
SCU B, ETH2
TOS, U20
PRINTER B
GLK-300, P2
DVI cable convertion
DISPLAY, DVI
CRP/INPUT, X3 (USB B)
CONVERTER RS232-485/RS422 OR PC, COM
CONVERTER COM/LAN
PRINTER
KVM
DPU - ESS, X4
ESS, P4
ACP X1 ANA IN
LIFI DSUB PLUG, P1
LEVER TERMINAL, X2
LIFI DSUB PLUG, P1/P2
INC. (IN COMMAND BREAKER)
TERMINAL SHH, X1
TERMINAL SHH, X2
RPM DETECTORS
RPM DETECTORS
RPM DETECTORS
LED FORK NQB101

PLUG
PLUG
SCREW
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
SCREW
PLUG
SCREW
PLUG
SCREW
PLUG
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
PLUG

CABLES
LENGHT
1M
3M
1M
0,5M
MISC.
3M
3M
2M
2M
2M
2,5M
3M
3M
3M
3M
3M
0,5M
3M
3M
3M
3M
3M
0,5M
0.20M
1.75M
3M
3,0M
3,0M
3M
3M
2,5M
2,0M
0,5M
2,4M
3M
0,15M
2,5M
3.0M
3.0M
10M
10M
10M
--

FIND IN
DRAWING CHAPTER

SIGNALS
TYPE

305949
305949
305949
334394
MISC.
NA
NA
None
None
327997
342670
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
327997
327997
327997
HA462829

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
POWER
POWER
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

HA455421
HA455421
329395
329395
357882
344029
344035
341580
344028
HA462401
HA462401
HA465013
HA465013
HA465013
355576

W00-99 KM MERCHANT MARINE SUPPLY


W100-> YARD SUPPLY

1,2
1,2
1,2
10,4
N/A
6,5
6,5
N/A
N/A
6,1
6,3
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,1
6,1
6,1
12
12
6,4
6,4
3,1
3,1
3,1
3,1
3,1
3,1
3,1
3,1
3,1
5
5
5
1

REMARKS / REQOMMENDATIONS
USB 2.0
USB 2.0
Light Intensity Control
ENEC STD 230VAC
STRAIGHT CABLE CAT6(S/FTP)
STRAIGHT CABLE CAT6(S/FTP)

VGA cable
SERIE
CROSSED CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP)
STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP)
STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP)
STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP)
STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP)
INSIDE CARGO CABINET
CROSSED CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP)
STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP)
STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP)
STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP)
STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP)
INSIDE CARGO CABINET

USB 2.0

USB 2.0 cable A-B, for MP7900 see dwg. 327997


USB 2.0
MAX 0.3M BETWEEN ESS/X1-K1

TO LIFI 70/80/90/120/150
CABLE SPLIT DSUB ESS, LIFI HANDLE/LIFI 70/80/90/120
ESS X1/P4

MECH. PROT. NEEDED(BY ENG.MAKER)


MECH. PROT. NEEDED(BY ENG.MAKER)
MECH. PROT. NEEDED(BY ENG.MAKER)
3,5 or 10M KM SUPPLY

Page 1 of 5

CABLE LIST, KM MERCHANT MARINE

CABLE
NAME
W101
W107
W108
W109
W110
W111
W112
W122
W123
W123
W124
W124
W124
W124
W124
W125
W125
W125
W125
W125
W125
W125
W126
W126
W126
W126
W127
W127
W127
W127
W128
W129
W130
W131
W132
W133
W135
W136
W137
W138
W139
W150
W151
W152
W153

FROM
UNIT NAME
TOS, X20
UPS, 220VAC
YARD POWER
POS, X10/ UPS POWER
WCU, X1-U7
SCU n, A1
SCU n, B1
TOS, X20 (OS1)
FIREWALL, X1
COM/LAN, X1
SWITCH A
SWITCH A
PC n, CAN NET
PC n, NET A
SCU n, A1
SWITCH B
SWITCH B
SWITCH B
SWITCH B
PC n, CAN NET
PC n, NET B
SCU n, B1
PC n, NET C
SCU A, ETH1
PC no. X NET C
SCU A, ETH1
PC n, NET C
SCU B, ETH1
PC n, NET C
SCU B, ETH1
SWITCH A
SWITCH B
BUZZER, X1
BUZZER, X1
BUZZER, X1
PC, COM
BW INDICATOR, X1
ACP, X1
ACP, X1
DPU-MEI
TERMINAL BOARD SSH, X1/X2
DPU (DI), X1
DPU (DI), X1
DPU (DI), X1
DPU (DO), X1

Doc no: 357834G CO15940

TO
TERM
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
PLUG
PLUG
SCREW
SOCKET
SOCKET
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
--SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
PLUG
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

UNIT NAME

TERM

WBU / WCU, X10


PC, POWER / GLN-300, U1
WBU, X10 (U4)
WCS UNITS, X10 (U3)
FIRE SENTRAL
SCU n+1, A2
SCU n+1, B2
TOS, X21 (OS2)
ADMIN NETWORK/SERVER
External PC, LAN
PC NET A
PRINTER
SCU A, ETH2
KVM
SCU n+1 A2
PC NET B
SERVER FLEET MANAGEMENT
PRINTER
FIREWALL
SCU B, ETH2
KVM
SCU n+1 B2
Cargo cabinet GLN-300, SW1
Cargo cabinet GLN-300, SW1
Cargo cab. GLN100/886, RCU502, P8
Ethernet connection
Cargo cabinet GLN-300, SW2
Cargo cabinet GLN-300, SW2
Cargo cab. GLN100/886, RCU502, P9
ETHERNET CONNECTION
PC NET A/SWITCH A
PC NET B/SWITCH B
WCS UNITS - X10 (U3)
ACP, X1
ESS-X4
PC, COM
DIMMER BOX
REV.COUNTER
HOUR RUN COUNTER
CHANGE OVER SWITCH
SPEED SET HANDLE P1/P2 (LF 180S-01.06)
ON/OFF UNIT
RESET UNIT
WH SYSTEM ON UNIT
ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM, ROT. LIGHT

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SOCKET
SOCKET
SCREW
SOCKET
SOCKET
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
PLUG
--SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
PLUG
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
PLUG
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

CABLES
LENGHT

-------

------

------------------

FIND IN
DRAWING CHAPTER

SIGNALS
TYPE

REMARKS / REQOMMENDATIONS

HA464552
331466
HA464552
HA464552
HA464552
NA
NA
HA464552
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
366381
None
None
HA464552
HA462767
HA462355
HA462829
348546
HA451693
HA450495

2
10-4
1,2
1,2
1,2
6,5
6,5
1,2
6
1,2
6
6
6,5
6,5
6
6
6

DATA
POWER
POWER
POWER
SIGNAL
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA

1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN


2 x 1.5mm
Power#2 from another source, galvanic isolated
Power#1 from W/H POS or UPS
1 PAIR
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 6(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 6(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN
CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.

6,5
6,5
6,5
6
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5

HA462401
HA460743
HA460743
HA460743
HA460743

3,1
4
4
4
4

DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
DATA
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
POWER

Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.


Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Other Ethernet Network, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
Other Ethernet Network, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.
SC connection needed in each end Fibre Optic cable
SC connection needed in each end Fibre Optic cable
1 PAIR
1 PAIR, 24VDC EXTERNAL SUPPLY
1 PAIR, 24VDC ESS RELAY ULNIT (K1 14/24)
2x2x0,5 TWIST PAIR W/BRAIDED SCREEN RS232, max 15m
10K POT CABLE GLAND PG 13,5 and PG16
1x2x0,75mm2 (24VDC SUPPLY FROM ACP X10, see HA468364)
1x2x0,75mm2 (BUILD IN BATTERY)
1 PAIR
2 Cable with D-sub connectors
Min 5x0.5, ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM
Min 2 or 4x0.5, ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM or Stand Alone
Min 3x0.5, ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM
Min 1.5, ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM

W00-99 KM MERCHANT MARINE SUPPLY


W100-> YARD SUPPLY

1,2
11,2
3,1
12
2,2
11,2
11,2

Page 2 of 5

CABLE LIST, KM MERCHANT MARINE

CABLE
NAME

FROM
UNIT NAME

TO
TERM

UNIT NAME

TERM

CABLES
LENGHT

FIND IN
DRAWING CHAPTER

SIGNALS
TYPE

4
4
4
4
4
4
4,3
4,4
3,1
4,4
4,4
3,1
4,4
4,4
4,4
4,4
14
14
14
4,2
4,2
4,2
4,2
4,2
4
5
4,3

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
POWER
POWER
POWER
POWER
SIGNAL
POWER
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

8
8
8
8
8
8

DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA

W150
W151
W152
W153
W154
W155
W160
W162
W163
W164
W165
W166
W167
W168
W169
W170
W172
W173
W174
W175
W176
W177
W178
W179
W180
W181
W182
W183
W184
W185
W186
W187
W189
W190
W188
W189
W190

Stand alone (DI), X1


Stand alone (DI), X1
Stand alone (DI), X1
Stand alone (DO), X1
DPU (DI), X1
DPU (DO), X1
WECS 9520 -MCP, X10
TERMINAL ESS-X4 (term. 9 - 12) (W/H)
ESS, X10 5(+)/3(-)
TERMINAL ESS-X4 (term. 9 - 12) (W/H)
TERMINAL ESS-X4 (W/H)
DPU - MEI
DPU - ESU (CABINET E10)
DPU - ESU (CABINET E10)
CPP BACK-UP BRIDGE
CPP BACK-UP ECR
RPM HANDLE, X1
DPU - MEI, X1
SWITCH AUTO/MANUEL ECR
CABINET ECU, X1
CONTROL UNIT AUX. BLOWER
IPU PANEL, X1
TERMINAL TBX
TERMINAL TBX
LCP E25
DPU - RPME, X1 (U2) 011/014
DPU - RPME, X1 (U2) 011/014
CPP THRUSTER CAB
CPP THRUSTER CAB
CPP THRUSTER CAB
CPP THRUSTER CAB
CPP THRUSTER CAB
CPP AZIMUTH THRUSTER CAB
CPP AZIMUTH THRUSTER CAB
CPP AZIMUTH THRUSTER CAB
CPP AZIMUTH THRUSTER CAB
CPP AZIMUTH THRUSTER CAB

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

ON/OFF UNIT
RESET UNIT
WH SYSTEM ON UNIT
ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM, ROT. LIGHT
Stand Alone, X1
Stand Alone, X1
E90 (Shipyard interface box)
BWU 09, XBW 1/2
ESSX4 1/2
BWU 09, XBW 1/2
TERMINAL ESS-X4 ((ECR)
TERMINAL BOARD SSH, X1/X2
TERMINAL ESS-X4 (term 5 -12)(ECR)
EMCY. STOP SWITCH (ER)
CPP TERMINAL, X1 (CPP CAB.)
CPP TERMINAL, X1 (CPP CAB.)
DPU-MEI, X1
CPP CONTROL SYSTEM, X1
DPU - MEI, X1
TERMINAL AUX BLOWER, X1
TERMINAL AUX BLOWER, X1
TERMINAL AUX BLOWER, X1
SPP, X1
DPU - ESS-X2
AUX BLOWER CONTROL
DPU - ESU, X1
CABINET E10, XE10
CPP CONTROL UNIT RR
CPP CONTROL UNIT KAWAZAKI
CPP CONTROL UNIT LIPS
CPP CONTROL UNIT ABB
CPP CONTROL UNIT VT 3000/REXROTH
CPP/ROTATION CONTROL UNIT AZI RR
CPP/ROTATION CONTROL UNIT AZI KAWAZAKI
CPP/ROTATION CONTROL UNIT AZI KAMEWA
CPP/ROTATION CONTROL UNIT AZI ABB
CPP/ ROTATION AZIMUT CLOSED LOOP

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

--------------------------------

HA460743
HA460743
HA460743
HA460743
HA458823
HA458823
HA349117
HA462357
HA462355
HA462357
HA462357
HA463146
HA462357
HA462357
357588
357588
SeaMate
SeaMate
SeaMate
HA463656
HA463656
HA463656
HA461556
HA461556
HA338221
HA462340
313845
Remarks
Remarks
Remarks
Remarks
Remarks
Remarks
Remarks
Remarks
Remarks
Remarks

W203
W203
W204
W204
W203
W204

DPU 1X8/X8, CAN1


DPU 2X8/X8, CAN1
DPU 1X9/X9, CAN2
DPU 1X9/X9, CAN2
DPU 2X8, PROCESS NET
DPU 2X9, PROCESS NET

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

DPU X8, CAN1


DPU X8, CAN1
DPU X9, CAN2
DPU X9, CAN2
DPU 2X8, PROCESS NET
DPU 2X9, PROCESS NET

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

-------

354338
Coming
354338
Coming
354337
354337

Doc no: 357834G CO15940

W00-99 KM MERCHANT MARINE SUPPLY


W100-> YARD SUPPLY

REMARKS / REQOMMENDATIONS
For Stand alone Min 5x0.5, ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM
For Stand alone Min 2 or 4x0.5, ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM
For Stand alone Min 3x 0.5, ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM
For Stand alone System Min 1.5
For Stand alone System Min 1.5, activation from Alarm system
For Stand alone System Min 1.5, alarm to Alarm system
1x2x1,5mm 24VDC
min. 1x2x1,5mm EM'CY STOP
1x2x1,5mm 24VDC supply to ESSX4
min. 1x2x1,5mm EM'CY STOP
Min. 3x2x1,5mm EM'CY STOP
Min. 11x0.5mm with braded screen
Min. 4x2x1,5mm EM'CY STOP
min. 1x2x1,5mm EM'CY STOP
6X0,5mm
6X0,5mm
2-4 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN
2-4 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN
1x2x0,75mm
3x1,5mm
8x2x1,5mm
14x2x1,5mm
10x2x1,0mm
5x2x0,75mm With Braided screen
2x2x0,75mm
2x2x0,75mm
Pending product department
Pending product department
Pending product department
Pending product department
Pending product department
Pending product department
Pending product department
Pending product department
Pending product department
Pending product department
1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN
1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN
1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN
1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN
1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN
1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN

Page 3 of 5

CABLE LIST, KM MERCHANT MARINE

CABLE
NAME

FROM
UNIT NAME

TO
TERM

UNIT NAME

TERM

CABLES
LENGHT

W205

DGU X8L / SCU 1X8

SCREW UG-890, TERMINAL 4-5 / 9-10

SCREW

--

W206
W207
W208
W209
W210
W212
W222
W223
W223
W229
W230
W231
W232
W233
W234
W235
W236
W237

WECS 9520 -MCP, X8


CABINET E25, X8/X9
CABINET E25, X8/X9
WECS 9520 E90
DPU (DO), X1
WECS 9520 -MCP, X1
DPU, X7/1X7/2X7
DGU, 1X7/2X7
DGU, 1X7/2X7
POWER SUPPLY UPS 24 VDC
POWER SUPPLY UPS 24 VDC
POWER SUPPLY UPS/PSO/PSO-P
PSO-P1, 1X10
PSO-P2, 1X10
PSO-P1, 2X10
PSO-P2, 2X10
PSO-P3, 1X10
PSO-P3, 2X10

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

----

W238

SWITCH BOARD (SUPPLY 1)

SCREW POWER SUPPLY UPS, X1

SCREW

--

W239

SWITCH BOARD (SUPPLY 2)

SCREW POWER SUPPLY UPS, X2 / U2

SCREW

--

W240
W241
W242
W243

ESB, 24V SUPPLY


MSB, 230V SUPPLY
CARGO CABINET, X10
CARGO CABINET, FX10

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

W244

DGU X10 / SCU X10

SCREW UG-890, TERMINAL 2-3 / 7-8

SCREW

W300
W302
W303
W304
W305
W306
W307
W308
W309
W320
W321
W322
W323
W324

TBX TERMINAL
SS-X40
TBX TERMINAL
DPU RAo-8, X1 (BRIDGE)
DPU RAo-8, X1 (ECR)
DPU MEI, X1
DPU RAi, X1
DPU ESU, X1
DPU C2, X1
Backup panel ECR,BP-X1
Backup panel Eng.room
Backup panel Eng.room
MEI
MEI

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

Doc no: 357834G CO15940

E90 WEC59520
E90
E90
MPP, X8
ROT. LIGHT, KLAXON
AUX BLOWER CABINET
SERIAL INTERFACE
ACTUATOR, X7
SERIAL INTERFACE RS422
PSO, 1X10
PSO, 2X10
DPU, X10 / OPU / U1 / U2
POWER SUPPLY FOR CABINET 1
POWER SUPPLY FOR CABINET 1
POWER SUPPLY FOR CABINET 3
POWER SUPPLY FOR CABINET 3
POWER SUPPLY FOR CABINET 1
POWER SUPPLY FOR CABINET 3

SEFA 160, X10


SEFA 800/1200, X10
CARGO CABINET FX10 (FUSES)
CARGO CABINET X1,X2,X3 SW1-8

DPU - ESU/C2, ECU, SENSOR


RPM INDICATOR, X1
DPU - ESU/C2, ECU, SENSONR
INSTRUMENTS - BRIDGE W & C
INSTRUMENTS - ECR
M.E. CONN. BOX/SENSORS
M.E. SLD SENSORS
M.E. SHD SENSORS
REV./ HOUR COUNTER
DPU MEI, X1
DPU C2#1
DPU ESU, X1
CLU-3
E10

---

----------

---------------

FIND IN
DRAWING CHAPTER
354338 &
353393
HA349117
Wrtsila
Wrtsila
Wrtsila
SeaMate
HA349117
341704
HA462521
HA462521
HA461629
HA461629
HA461629
HA461629
HA461629
HA461629
HA461629
HA461629
HA461629
HA462905 or
347544
HA462905 or
347544
332126
332126
335899
335899
HA461629 &
353393
HA464124
HA463834
HA464209
SEAMATE
SEAMATE
SEAMATE
SEAMATE
SEAMATE
SEAMATE
SEAMATE
SEAMATE
SEAMATE
SEAMATE
SEAMATE

W00-99 KM MERCHANT MARINE SUPPLY


W100-> YARD SUPPLY

SIGNALS
TYPE

REMARKS / REQOMMENDATIONS

DATA

14
4,3
8
4,5
4,5
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

DATA
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
DATA
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
DATA
DATA
DATA
POWER
POWER
POWER
POWER
POWER
POWER
POWER
POWER
POWER

1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN


1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN, WECS
1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN, WECS
1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN
Min. 2 x 1.5
2x2x0,75mm
2 or 4 x 0.5 TWIST PAIR W/BRAIDED SCREEN
3 pair 0.75 TWISTED PAIR W/BRAIDED SCHREEN
3 pair 0.75 TWISTED PAIR W/BRAIDED SCHREEN
2 x 6.0
2 x 6.0
2x2.5mm
2x2x2.5mm
2x2x2.5mm
2x2x2.5mm
2x2x2.5mm
2x2x2.5mm
2x2x2.5mm

1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN

10

POWER

230VAC, ( i.e MSB 1 )

10

POWER

230VAC, ( i.e MSB 2 / ESB )

4,5
4,5
9,3,1
9,3,1

POWER
POWER
POWER
POWER

2x4.0m2 (24VDC, 20A)


3x2.5m2 with PE EARTH (230VAC, 16A)
2x1 min.2.5mm
2x1 min.1.5mm

9,3,1

POWER

2x1 min. 2.5mm

4,2
11
4,2
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14

SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS

13 x 1.0 (ECU006-15)
2 X 0.5, DIMMER FUNCTION
17 x 1.0 (ECU005)
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN

Page 4 of 5

CABLE LIST, KM MERCHANT MARINE

CABLE
NAME

FROM
UNIT NAME

TO
TERM

UNIT NAME

TERM

CABLES
LENGHT

Aux.bl 1 cab.
Aux.bl 2 cab.
E10
E10
E28

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

------

W325
W326
W327
W328
W329

C2#1
C2#1
C2#1
ESU
Rai 16

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

W330

GL-7A

SCREW Z972 or other suitable zener barrier

SCREW

W331
W333
W334
W335

Backup panel Eng.room


C2#2
GLK-300, X2
GLA-300, X202

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

W336

GT402, GT403, GT404, GC 103

SCREW DZ-110, Rai or other

SCREW

W337
W338

IS-BAR & PE-BAR in cargo cabinet


GLK-300, X1.3

SCREW Ship's Hull


SCREW IS-BAR

SCREW
SCREW

W339

MN-1995

SCREW Z954, Rai or other

SCREW

W340
W341
W342
W343
W344
W345
W346
W347
W348

DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR


DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR
DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR
DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR
DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR
DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR
DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR
DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR
DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

CPP, back-up, BU-X1, Bridge


CPP, back-up, BU-X1, Bridge
CPP, back-up, ECR-X1, ECR
CPP, back-up, ECR-X1, ECR
CPP, Servo unit ASP12, J2
CPP, Servo unit ASP12, J3
CPP, back-up, BU-X1, Bridge
CPP, back-up, ECR-X1, ECR
CPP, Servo / Control unit

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

W400
W401
W402
W403
W404
W405

DPU-DGU, X8L + X10


Bearing wear, end of Can Bus A
RTIxe/SIUxe, X1
SIU, X1
UG-890 / CANopen T-piece, CAN + POWER
CANopen T-piece, CAN + POWER

SCREW
PLUG
SCREW
SCREW
PLUG
PLUG

UG-890
WaterInOil, MMT330-8BA/C
CONNECTION BOX UG-920,X1
358667 Connection box for GT-26
CANopen T-piece
PS 11 SENSOR

W406

CANopen T-piece, CAN + POWER

W410
W411
W412
W413
W414

GLK-100A, X81
AL-100B/EXRP, COMM/POWER
AL-100A/18EX, COMM/POWER
AL-100A/18EX, INP 1->3
AL-100A/18EX, INP 4->7

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

DPU X8, X9

SCREW None

Doc no: 357834G CO15940

PLUG

DPU C2#2
E10
GLA-300, X1
GC-300, X4

GN14 / GB200
GLA-100/5
AL-100A/18EX, COMM/POWER
AL-100A/18EX, COMM/POWER
UG-855
UG-855

---

FIND IN
DRAWING CHAPTER

SIGNALS
TYPE

SEAMATE
SEAMATE
SEAMATE
SEAMATE
SEAMATE

14
14
14
14
14

SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS

GL-2379

1,5

SIGNALS

SEAMATE
SEAMATE
GL-2641
GL-2641

14
14
1,1
1,1

SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS

341707 or
341712(Ex)
GL-2641
GL-2641

SIGNALS

1,1
1,1

EARTH
EARTH

REMARKS / REQOMMENDATIONS
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN

2 Twist pairs w/braided screen, min.0.5 if only 1 switch


4 Twist pairs w/braided screen, min.0.5 if 2 switches
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.1x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.2x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN

1 Twist pair w/braided screen, min.0.5, 4-20mA


Earth cable min. 16mm
Earth cable min. 1.0mm

341707 or
341712(Ex)

SIGNALS

2 Twist pairs w/braided screen, min.0.5, PT100 elem. 3 wires

----------

Remarks
Remarks
Remarks
Remarks
Remarks
Remarks
Remarks
Remarks
Remarks

4,4
4,4
4,4
4,4
4,4
4,4
4,4
4,4
4,4

SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
SIGNALS

4 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT


4 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT
4 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT
4 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT
4 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT
4 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT
6 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT
6 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT
8 x 1,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
PLUG
PLUG

-------

1,2
1,2
8
1,6
1
1

PLUG

--

SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW

------

UX-808
UX-808
355516
358638
UX-808
UX-808/UX-788
UX808/GB10
88/GN-056
366523
366524
366524
366526
366526
None

N/A

W00-99 KM MERCHANT MARINE SUPPLY


W100-> YARD SUPPLY

1
1
1
1
1
1

ER
CANopen Bulk Cable,AWG20, AWG16 w/ IND.SCREEN
ER
CanOpen Cable 7/8" male - open ended
ER
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.4x0,5mm w/ BRAID.SCREEN
ER
MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.2x0,5mm w/ IND.SCREEN
ER
Canopen cable 7/8" male - 7/8" female
SIGNAL+POWE CANopen cable M12-M12
SIGNAL+POWERCANopen cable M12 male - open ended
ER
ER
ER
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
120ohm

MULTICABLE 4 PAIR min.0,75mm, COMMON SCREEN


MULTICABLE 2 PAIR min.0,75mm, COMMON SCREEN
MULTICABLE 2 PAIR min.0,75mm, COMMON SCREEN
MULTICABLE 7 PAIR min.0,75mm, COMMON SCREEN
MULTICABLE 10 PAIR min.0,75mm, COMMON SCREEN
RESISTOR, TERMINATOR CAN NETWORK

Page 5 of 5

Type of file
Type of system
Yard and nb.
Ship name
KM ref.

Scope of supply
K-Gauge GL-300 / Tank Gauging System
HMD H2547
TRF MANDAL
i034739

Item name

Project responsible: H.C.Ku


Order no.:
Revision: C
Revision date & sign: 2013.12.24 GSS
2014.05.03 GSS
2015.01.25 GSS
Item number

Quantity

Remark

GLN-300 floor mount cabinet

334364

1.00

Color : RAL 7032

ADHESIVE BADGE 60X60mm KONGSBERG LOGO

6771-002.0002

1.00

(KMCJ supply)

BRACKET FOR EART BAR SH1PA 2998,6 CAW

7390-011.0002

17.00

(KMCJ supply)

SIGNAL PROCESSING UNIT***ATEX Product***

GLK-300

17.00

TBUS Contact ME 17,5,1,5/ 5-ST-3,81 KMGYPhoenixnr. 2713645.

704033

30.00

PLUGG,PC-KLEMME 1803604 MC1,5/5-ST-3,81

7367-014.0005

2.00

RSupport200

302248

6.00

Fan housing for GLK-300. Double, for 2 pcs GLK-300

341236

8.00

Fan housing for GLK-300. Single, for one GLK-300

343893

1.00

Axial Fan 40x40x20mm. Sanyo Denki - 109P0424D601

343887

6.00

FL Switch SFNT 8TX RJ45 Unmanaged Phoenix swith

363209

3.00

PLUG VS-08-RJ45-5-Q/IP20

316865

2.00

RAi-16xe Module

329714

2.00

ZENER BARRIER 4-20mA

DZ-110

20.00

Power, QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20Phoenix Part No. 2866776

326574

2.00

Fuse FAZ-C 6A 2-pole

362419

2.00

13.3" Touch screen Computer with Dure Core CPU

349998

1.00

SCU module

329785

1.00

350089

1.00

K-Gauge GL-300, ACCOMMODATION (MAIN CABINET)

K-Gauge GL-300, ACCOMMODATION (MAIN CABINET)


UPS EATON 3KVA 220VAC complete

K-Gauge GL-300, ACCOMMODATION(Atmospheric pressure measring)

Cable out-diameter : 12.7 mm

PRESS.TRANSM.0,8-1,4B ABS.0,Car

GT402A4C0,6V

1.00

Inst. Kit atmospheric pressure transmitter

GT-2092

1.00

Nameplate

E-2660

1.00

1 of 4

Item name

Item number

Quantity

Remark

K-Gauge GL-300, EQUIPMENT ON DECK(GLA-300/P Type Radar)


GLA-300/P Prot. Hose M32/M20

Ref. D-GL-2661

GLA-300/P113PJ

8.00

Main : 21.1 mm / Temp : 12.1 mm


For No.1~7 Cargo TK(P) & Slop TK(S)

GLA-300/P Prot. Hose M32/M20

Ref. D-GL-2661

GLA-300/P131PJ

8.00

Main : 21.1 mm / Temp : 12.1 mm


For No.1~7 Cargo TK(S) & Slop TK(P)

INS-GLA-300

16.00

UY-149-2 is applied

Installation kit for GLA-300


Straight adapter for GLA-300/P

GL-2521

16.00

Length is 700 mm
for No.1 ~ 7 Cargo Tank(P/S) & Slop Tank(P/S)

Flexible Cable Protection Tube with flange 1 1/4JIS 5K-50A

GL-1389/xxx

7.00

For No.1~7 Cargo TK(P) / Refer to attached page.

Flexible Cable Protection Tube with flange 1 1/4

GL-1389/xxx

9.00

Refer to attached page.

Flexible Cable Protection Tube with flange 3/4

GL-1387/xxx

16.00

Refer to attached page.

16.00

Cable out-diameter : 12.7 mm

K-Gauge GL-300, EQUIPMENT ON DECK(Cargo Manifold Line Pressure Measuring)


PRESS.TRANSM. 1-41B ABS. 0,9% PG16
***ATEX Product***

Ref. GT-2040

GT404D4H40T

Adapter flange

GT-325/03

14.00

Cargo manifold pressure line

Adapter flange

GT-325/04

2.00

Slop manifold pressure line

Protection Cover

GT-740

16.00

Screw M6x35

UTN014/6M

96.00

Lock washer

UTN025/6

96.00

K-Gauge GL-300, EQUIPMENT ON DECK(N2 Gas Main line Pressure)


PRESS.TRANSM.0,8-1,4B ABS.0,25% PG16
Ref. GT-2045
***ATEX Product***

GT402A4C0,6K

Cable out-diameter : 12.7 mm


1.00

Adapter flange

GT-769

1.00

Protection Cover

GT-740

1.00

Screw Hex. M6x20 AISI316

UTN014/6H

4.00

Counter Nut 1/2" BSP AISI316

6531-007.1002

1.00

K-Gauge GL-300, EQUIPMENT ON DECK(N2 Gas line Pressure for Residual Tank)

Pre-Installation

Cable out-diameter : 12.7 mm

PRESS.TRANSM.0,8-1,4B ABS.0,25% PG16


Ref. BL071
***ATEX Product***

GT402A4C0,6K

1.00

TEFLON THRED TAPE, GOLDEND 1/2 CHE

6340-008.0012

1.00

ADAPTER UNIT TYPE UP-448

UP-448

1.00

2 of 4

Item name

Item number

Quantity

K-Gauge GL-300, EQUIPMENT ON DECK(Ballast Pump Disch.)


PRESS.TRANSM.0-10B ABS.0,25% PG16
***ATEX Product***

Ref. GT-2047

Remark
Cable out-diameter : 12.7 mm

GT403A0A10D

2.00

Shock absorber AISI 316

GT-1244/3

2.00

Connection box

UG-917

2,00

Flange with PUR cable

GT-1504/250

2.00

Protection hose adapter

GL-2519

2.00

Flexible Cable Protection Tube with flange 3/4 JIS 5K-40A

GL-1387/350

2.00

Length is 350 mm.

16.00

Middle
Bottom

K-Gauge GL-300, EQUIPMENT ON FRAMO TOP-MOUNTING(Tank temp. Measuring)


TEMP.SENSOR 2WIRE PT1000 L=8000 mm

MN-1535SM

Length is 25000 mm.

Cable out-diameter : 12.1 mm

TEMP.SENSOR 2WIRE PT1000 L=14500 mm

MN-1535SM

16.00

Cargo Temperature Unit

GC-300-KM1

16.00

GASKET FOR GC-300, Novaflon

UY-148-3

16.00

Installation kit for GC-300

INS-GC-300

3.00

Flexible Cable Protection Tube with flange 3/4

GL-1387/xxx

16.00

Refer to attached page.

Bottom

K-Gauge GL-300, EQUIPMENT ON DECK(Tank temp. Measuring for Residual Tank)

Cable out-diameter : 12.1 mm

TEMP.SENSOR 2WIRE PT1000 L=2400 mm

MN-1535SM

1.00

Cargo Temperature Unit

GC-300-KM1

1.00

GASKET FOR GC-300, Novaflon

UY-148-3

1.00

Adapter for GC-300 JIS25A pipe

Ref. 353163

353167

1.00

Installation kit for GC-300

INS-GC-300

1.00

Flexible Cable Protection Tube with flange 3/4

GL-1387/xxx

1.00

RES-GL-300

1.00

Pre-Installation
Refer to attached page.

K-Gauge GL-300, Spare parts


Spareparts for GL-300

3 of 4

Item name

Item number

Quantity

Remark

4 of 4

K-Gauge GL-300 Cargo Level System


Sensor connection list and tankname overview
System information:

Revision history:

Yard/hull: HMD H2547

2013.12.24 GSS

KM ref. No: i034739

2015.01.05 GSS

Tank

Measuring point

Sensor/transmitter

GL-300 cabinet conn.

Connection dwg.

NO.1(P) C.O. TK.

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 1 X2

GL-2641

NO.1(S) C.O. TK.

NO.2(P) C.O. TK.

NO.2(S) C.O. TK.

NO.3(P) C.O. TK.

NO.3(S) C.O. TK.

NO.4(P) C.O. TK.

NO.4(S) C.O. TK.

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 1 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 1 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 1 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 2 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 2 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 2 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 2 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 3 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 3 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 3 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 3 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 4 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 4 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 4 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 4 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 5 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 5 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 5 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 5 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 6 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 6 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 6 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 6 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 7 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 7 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 7 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 7 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 8 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 8 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 8 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 8 X1

GL-2641

NO.5(P) C.O. TK.

NO.5(S) C.O. TK.

NO.6(P) C.O. TK.

NO.6(S) C.O. TK.

NO.7(P) C.O. TK.

NO.7(S) C.O. TK.

SLOP(P) TK.

SLOP(S) TK.

Residual

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 9 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 9 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 9 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 9 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 10 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 10 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 10 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 10 X1

GL-2641
GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 11 X2

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 11 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 11 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 11 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 12 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 12 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 12 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 12 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 13 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 13 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 13 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 13 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 14 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 14 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 14 X1

GL-2641
GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 14 X1

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 15 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 15 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 15 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 15 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 16 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 16 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 16 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 16 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 17 X1

GL-2641

Sensor connection list

A:2013-12-24
B:2014-05-03
C:2014-05-21
D:2014-12-30

K-GAUGE GL-300 Cargo Level System

Yard / Hull: HMD H2547


KM ref no: i034739

E:2014-12-31
F:2015-02-12
G:
H:

Project mgr: Hyeon-Chul, Ku


Project eng: Gyeong Su Seo

Term (int)

Term (ext)

Ext. Conn. Dwg Sensor dwg.

Measurement

Vessel

DPU 0520

RAi-16xe-(011/012)

341707

4-20mA

Draft(AFT)

Signal comes from HANLA

RAi-16xe-(021/022)

341707

4-20mA

Draft(FWD)

Signal comes from HANLA

RAi-16xe-(031/032)

341707

4-20mA

Draft(MID P)

Signal comes from HANLA

RAi-16xe-(041/042)

341707

4-20mA

Draft(MID S)

Signal comes from HANLA

RAi-16xe-(051/052)

341707

GT-1097

4-20mA

Atmospheric Pressure

RAi-16xe-(062)

341707

GT-2045

4-20mA

N2 Gas Main Line pressure

RAi-16xe-(072)

341707

GT-2047

4-20mA

Ballast Pump Disch. Line pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(082)

341707

GT-2047

4-20mA

Ballast Pump Disch. Line pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(092)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.1 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(102)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.2 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(112)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.3 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(122)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.4 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(132)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.5 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(142)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.6 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(152)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.7 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(162)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

Slop Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(012)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.1 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(022)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.2 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(032)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.3 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(042)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.4 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(052)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.5 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(062)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.6 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(072)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.7 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(082)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

Slop Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(092)

341707

4-20mA

N2 Gas line pressure for Residual

RAi-16xe-(101/102)

Spare

RAi-16xe-(111/112)

Spare

RAi-16xe-(121/122)

Spare

RAi-16xe-(131/132)

Spare

RAi-16xe-(141/142)

Spare

RAi-16xe-(152/154)

341707

DI

Quint power fail

RAi-16xe-(162/164)

Spare

DPU 0521

Int.Conn. dwg

Tag

Sensor/transmitter

Layout

Rev

A
GT-402(DZ-110_01)
GT-403(DZ-110_02)
GT-403(DZ-110_03)

GT-404(DZ-110_04)
GT-404(DZ-110_05)
GT-404(DZ-110_06)
GT-404(DZ-110_07)
GT-404(DZ-110_08)
GT-404(DZ-110_09)
GT-404(DZ-110_10)
GT-404(DZ-110_11)

GT-404(DZ-110_12)
GT-404(DZ-110_13)
GT-404(DZ-110_14)
GT-404(DZ-110_15)
GT-404(DZ-110_16)
GT-404(DZ-110_17)
GT-404(DZ-110_18)
GT-404(DZ-110_19)

GT-402(DZ-110_20)

F
F
F

F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F

F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F

C
E

K-Gauge GL-300 Cargo Level System

MAIN CABINET 1 FUSE OVERVIEW

F7

F6

F5

F4

F3

F2

F1

F40

F30

6A

6A

6A

6A

6A

6A

2A

2A

2A

2x10A

2x10A

Fuse Size

IPC/AIPC

RAIx,

DOOR FAN

X3

X2

X1

SW A1-3

FAN1-6

U02

U01

Unit

1/4

1/4

1/4

V1/V2

+/-

N,L,GND

N,L,GND

24V POWER FOR GLK-300 17

24V POWER FOR GLK-300 9-16

24V POWER FOR GLK-300 1-8

230VAC FROM YARD SUPPLY

230VAC FROM UPS

Term. Description

Zener Barrier 1-20

SPARE

13.3" TOUCH SCREEN COMPUTER

DPU's

FAN FOR VENTILATION OF CABINET

SPARE

ETHERNET SWITCH A

FAN FOR GLK-300 RADAR PROCESSING UNITS

F8

X10 1/3

F9
6A

2A
DZ110

F11

F10

HMD H2547

Power
X010 (24VDC)

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

Request information sheet for


K-Gauge GL-300 CLS

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

Requested information for K-Gauge GL-300 Cargo Level System


Yard and hull number:
Ship owner:
Name of ship:
Purchasing responsible:
Project responsible:
Telephone no.:
E-mail:
Commissioning Date:
Type of vessel:
Date:
Signature by yard:

HMD H2547
NAVIG8
TRF MANDAL
Mr. J.H.Woo
+82-52-250-6735
jhwoo@hmd.co.kr
37K Product Tanker

(confirming that information given in this document


is correct. This information will be used by
Kongsberg Maritime to start engineering and
manufacture the specified parts)

Revisions
A. 2013.12.24 GSS : First issue
B. 2014.05.03 GSS : Updated with information from shipyard.
NOTE; The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice. Kongsberg Maritime AS shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this document. 2010 Kongsberg Maritime AS. All rights reserved. No part of this work covered by the copyright hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied
without prior permission from Kongsberg Maritime AS.

1299169B

1. GENERAL INFORMATION

Tank Monitoring

Cargo Cabinet (Fig.364414 and 364417)

Requested Information Sheet

System Config (Choose one in each box)

check

Volume presentation in Operator Station


No Volume presentation in Operator Station

Ref.point for cargo ullage at Manual


Sounding (Standard)
Ref.point for cargo ullage at Radar pos
Ref.point for cargo ullage at Centre of
Gravity
Monitors will be console(flush)mounted
Monitors will be desk mounted

Std Cabinet color (RAL 7035):


Std right hinged door:
Std 230Vac Power:
Note: Any choice of Non-Std may lead to

Non Std Color:____________


Non Std left hinged door:
NonStd 110Vac Power:

Other Comments:
__________________________________
__________________________________
__________________________________

price add if not agreed during sales

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

2. The GL-300 Radar Tank Gauge - information tank data

Requested Information Sheet

Definition Hr:

Definition Hb:

The vertical distance from GL0 to MP (manual sounding, UTI).

The distance from GL0 to tank bottom, measured vertically below RTG.
Hr + Hb = MPB

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

3. Definitions of GL0, Gauge Socket, Hr, MP and Quadrants


Location of GL0

Sign of the Hr

Manual Ullage point, (MP)


GL0
GL0

Sign of the Hr

Manual Ullage point, (MP)


GL0
GL0

Manual Ullage point, (MP)


GL0
GL0

+HR
HR

CG:
MP:

Centre of gravity
Manual point

La:

Longitudinal distance from


sensor to CG
Longitudinal distance from
sensor to MP
Transversal distance from
sensor to CG
Transversal distance from
sensor to MP

Lb:
Ta:
Tb:

Longitudinal distance from


AP to sensor
Trans: Transversal distance from
CL to sensor

-HR

<< PORT
La: +
Ta: Lb: +
Tb: -

FWD

La, Lb

STBD >>
Qadrant 2

Qadrant 1

MP

Tb

La: +
Ta: +
Lb: +
Tb: +

Lb
CG

Ta
RADAR

La

Ta, Tb

Long:

La: Ta: Lb: Tb: -

Qadrant 3

Qadrant 4

M42-00000.109

La: Ta: +
Lb: Tb: +

AFT

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

4. Radar Tank Gauge - Parabolic type Code

Requested Information Sheet

Fig GL-2661

1299169B

5. Radar Tank Gauge Horn type code

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

Fig GL-2662
7

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

6. TANKS - Radar type, position and outer cable dim

Hb
mm

Hr
mm

Exact values for commissioning


Long. Trans.
Tb
Lb
Ta
La
AP
CL
Mm mm mm mm
mm
Mm

No.1 COT(P)

16443

110

-560

No.1 COT(S)

16443

110

560

No.2 COT(P)

16443

110

No.2 COT(S)

16443

No.3 COT(P)

Tank
no.

Tank Name

Quadrant
no.

Radar type

Protection
Flex tube type
GLA-300/xABCDE GL13XX/XXX
code
mm

15200

-4465

GLA-300/P113PJ

15200

4465

GLA-300/P131PJ

-560

136305

-4465

GLA-300/P113PJ

110

560

136305

4465

GLA-300/P131PJ

16443

110

-560

120140

-4465

GLA-300/P113PJ

No.3 COT(S)

16443

110

560

120140

4465

GLA-300/P131PJ

No.4 COT(P)

16443

110

-560

102200

-4465

GLA-300/P113PJ

No.4 COT(S)

16443

110

560

102200

4465

GLA-300/P131PJ

No.5 COT(P)

16443

110

-560

81115

-4465

GLA-300/P113PJ

10

No.5 COT(S)

16443

110

560

81115

4465

GLA-300/P131PJ

11

No.6 COT(P)

16443

110

-560

68100

-4465

GLA-300/P113PJ

12

No.6 COT(S)

16443

110

560

68100

4465

GLA-300/P131PJ

GL-1389/
GL-1387/
GL-1389/
GL-1387/
GL-1389/
GL-1387/
GL-1389/
GL-1387/
GL-1389/
GL-1387/
GL-1389/
GL-1387/
GL-1389/
GL-1387/
GL-1389/
GL-1387/
GL-1389/
GL-1387/
GL-1389/
GL-1387/
GL-1389/
GL-1387/
GL-1389/
GL-1387/

Cable dim.
Mm

Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1
Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1
Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1
Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1
Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1
Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1
Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1
Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1
Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1
Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1
Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1
Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

13

No.7 COT(P)

16443

110

-560

53350

-4465

GLA-300/P113PJ

14

No.7 COT(S)

16443

110

560

53350

4465

GLA-300/P131PJ

15

Slop T(P)

16443

164

635

300

39800

-3270

GLA-300/P131PJ

16

Slop T(S)

16443

164

-635

300

39800

3270

GLA-300/P113PJ

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

GL-1389/
GL-1387/
GL-1389/
GL-1387/
GL-1389/
GL-1387/
GL-1389/
GL-1387/

Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1
Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1
Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1
Main : 21.1
Temp : 12.1

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

7. CARGO TANKS Temperature box for FRAMO pump installation:

Requested Information Sheet

Temperature box for deck installation:

10

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

8. CARGO TANKS temperature Sensors

Length of sensor
Tank no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Tank Name

No.1 COT(P)
No.1 COT(S)
No.2 COT(P)
No.2 COT(S)
No.3 COT(P)
No.3 COT(S)
No.4 COT(P)
No.4 COT(S)
No.5 COT(P)
No.5 COT(S)
No.6 COT(P)
No.6 COT(S)
No.7 COT(P)
No.7 COT(S)
Slop T(P)
Slop T(S)
Residual Tank

Low
mm

14500
14500
14500
14500
14500
14500
14500
14500
14500
14500
14500
14500
14500
14500
14500
14500
2400

Middle
mm

8000
8000
8000
8000
8000
8000
8000
8000
8000
8000
8000
8000
8000
8000
8000
8000

Top
mm

Protection
Flex tube type
GL13XX/XXX
mm

GL-1387
GL-1387
GL-1387
GL-1387
GL-1387
GL-1387
GL-1387
GL-1387
GL-1387
GL-1387
GL-1387
GL-1387
GL-1387
GL-1387
GL-1387
GL-1387
GL-1387

Conn.box
Type
GC-300-XXX
Code

GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1
GC-300-KM1

Cable dim.
mm

12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1

NOTE; Sensor
manufacturing length
tolerance is 10 mm.
Note also that this
sensor cannot be
shortened or
lengthened after
production, so it is
important that
possible adapter
height above deck or
pump connection box
offset are included in
the given sensor
lengths

11

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

9. Data for draft, Trim and List calculations


+

CL

FP

DMF
DF
TF

DWL

DA

LS
TA

DMA
LMA

+
B/2
B

ZF

Draft mark
Draft sensor
Forward perpendicular
Aft perpendicular
Midships
Baseline, bottom reference
Centerline
Design water line
Longitudinal distance AP to FP
Moulded beam/breadth (amidships)
Depth, distance BL to deck
Draft, distance BL to DWL

LMA, LMM, LMF


TF, TA, TP, TS
LF, LA, LP, LS
ZF, ZA, ZP, ZS

LA

AP

FP
AP
BL
CL
DWL
LPP
B
D
T

LMM

LP

DA

BL

DS

LF

TS

DS

ZA

ZP

DMS

LPP
LPP/2

DF

TP

LMF

DP
DMP

DP

ZS

CL

Longitudinal distance AP to draft mark


Transversal distance CL to sensor
Longitudinal distance AP to sensor
Vertical distance BL to sensor

- Longitudinal distance is positive forward of AP


- Transversal distance from CL is positive to starboard
- Trim is positive by the stern and negative by the head
- List is positive to port and negative to starboard

12

1299169B

Main dimensions
Length P/P
Mld. Breadth
Depth
Draft
Draft sensor
data
Fwd draft sensor
Aft draft sensor
Port draft sensor
Stbd draft sensor
Fwd draft marks
Aft draft marks
Mid draft marks

Tank Monitoring

LPP
B
D
T

Requested Information Sheet

Dist (mm)
Trim measured by inclinometer
167600
27400
List measured by inclinometer

Long dist - L
(mm)
LF
167620
LA
25200
LP
88550
LS
88550
LMF
167600
LMA
9300
LMM
82900

Trans dist - T
(mm)
TF
987
TA
5985
TP
11500
TS
11500

ZF
ZA
ZP
ZS

Height - Z
(mm)

105
3355
0
0

PURcable
length
(mm)

Sensor
maker
HANLA
HANLA
HANLA
HANLA

EX-area
(yes/no)

Valve
UP-332/
UP-288

Note: In order to achieve the best accuracy, draft sensors should be mounted on centre line. If this is not possible, the sensors should be
mounted in the same distance at the same side of the centre line. List measurement sensors should be mounted symmetrically related to the
centre line.

13

1299169B

10.

GT-2000

Tank Monitoring

Pressure Sensor Installation types for level monitoring


GT-2010

GT-2020

GT-2050

GT-2060

Submerged
Installation

Humid area
Installation

Humid area
Installation

Dry Installation

Dry Installation

GT403

GT403

GT403

GT402

GT402

Typical Inst;
Water Ballast

Typical Inst;
Void Space

Typical Inst;
Void Space

Typical Inst;
HFO/DO

Typical Inst; FW

Requested Information Sheet

Sensor offset for level


measurements:

14

1299169B

11.

Tank Monitoring

Pressure sensor installation types for pipe pressure


GT-2040

GT-2045

GT-1230

Requested Information Sheet

GT-2047

Deck Installation

Deck Installation

Deck Installation

Submerged installation

Typical Inst; Cargo Line

Typical Inst; Vapour Line

Typical Inst; Cargo Line


Asphalt/Bitumen

Typical Inst; Ballast line

15

1299169B

12.

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

Data for pipe pressure measurement

Line no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Name

Cargo Manifold Line


Cargo Manifold Line
Cargo Manifold Line
Cargo Manifold Line
Cargo Manifold Line
Cargo Manifold Line
Cargo Manifold Line
Cargo Manifold Line
Cargo Manifold Line
Cargo Manifold Line
Cargo Manifold Line
Cargo Manifold Line
Cargo Manifold Line
Cargo Manifold Line
Cargo Manifold Line
Cargo Manifold Line
N2 Gas Main Line
Ballast Pump Disch.
Ballast Pump Disch.
N2 Gas Line for Residual Tank

PUR cable
length (if
GT403)
mm

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
25000
25000
N/A

Cable dim.

MIN bar
pressure
mbar

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-0.07
-1
-1
-0.07

MAX bar
pressure
mbar

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
0.25
5
5
0.25

Ex-Area
Yes/No

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Installation
Ref. previous page
GT-XXXX

GT-2040
GT-2040
GT-2040
GT-2040
GT-2040
GT-2040
GT-2040
GT-2040
GT-2040
GT-2040
GT-2040
GT-2040
GT-2040
GT-2040
GT-2040
GT-2040
GT-2045
GT-2047
GT-2047
GT-2045

mm

12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7
12.7

16

Type of file
Type of system
Yard and Hull.
Ship name
KM ref.

Spare part & tools list


K-Gauge GL-300 / Tank Gauging System
HMD H2547
NAVIG8 ALABASTER
I034739
Sign: 2013.12.24 GSS

Pos

Spare part description

Spare

Weight
a piece

Material

Fuses 2A
5X20mm SLOW

10

1g

Glass

Fuses 6.3A
5X20mm SLOW

10

1g

Glass

Fan Axial
40X40X20 mm

10g

Plastic

Outline

Tank Tables and Data

K-Chief 500
Tank Tables and Data from costumer
In order to perform best possible trim-/list correction etc.
for measured levels, Kongsberg Maritime need information
from yard/customer on a certain format.

313545/A

K-Chief 500

Revisions
Rev.
A
B
C
D

Written by
Date
11.06.07

Sign.
US

Checked by
Date

Sign.

Approved by
Date
Sign.
11.6.07
AS

Document history

Rev. A

First issue

The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice.
Kongsberg Maritime AS shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental
or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this
document.
2007 Kongsberg Maritime AS. All rights reserved. No part of this work covered by
the copyright hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied without prior permission
from Kongsberg Maritime AS.

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Bekkajordet
P.O.Box 1009
N-3194 Horten,
Norway

Telephone: +47 33 03 20 00
Telefax: +47 85 02 80 28
www.kongsberg.com

313545/A

Tank Tables and Data

Table of contents
1

GENERAL ................................................................................................................4

CAPACITY TABLES ..............................................................................................6

TRIM TABLES ........................................................................................................9

313545/A

K-Chief 500

1 GENERAL
Some abbreviations:
AP - Aft Perpendicular. Longitudinal position. Normally
centre of rudderstock (if any).
FP - Fore Perpendicular. Longitudinal position. Normally the
intersection between bow contour and construction waterline.
Lpp - Length between perpendiculars. Longitudinal distance
AP-FP.
Lpp/2 - Midships. Midways between AP and FP.
LCG - Longitudinal Center of Gravity.
TCG - Transverse Centre of Gravity.
LCF - Longitudinal Centre of Flotation. Longitudinal
coordinate. (See below: Center of Flotation).
TCF - Transverse Centre of Flotation. Transverse coordinate
(see below: Center of Flotation).
Centre of Flotation - Given by the coordinates LCF and TCF.
Centre of Gravitation for liquid surface. In Centre of
Flotation, liquid level is not changing when ship trimming
and listing. Liquid level in Centre of Flotation is equal to the
level all over the tank if there had been no trim an list (trim =
list = 0.0). Note that Centre of Flotation, for a certain filling,
may differ considerable from Centre of Gravity for the
volume if tank has great shape.

In order to perform best possible trim-/list correction etc. for


measured levels, we need infomation from yard/customer on
certain format. The quality (accuracy) of level correction and
volume calculation are highly influenced by the supplied data.
There are basically two different types of tank tables that may be
supplied: capacity tables and trims tables. This also applies
when there is ullage measuring of tanks.
Trim tables normally give the best result, but regular capacity
tables with surface data (LCF and TCF) may give a good result.

313545/A

Tank Tables and Data

Note

All tables supplied must be of the same type. Either capacity


tables (only 1 volume column) or trim tables with same number
of volume columns, and for the same trim values.

For basis SW 60052.07.004 and later, both trim tables and


capacity tables may be used. The trim tables must then be of the
same format (same trim values).
Data to be supplied:
Trim tables/Capacity tables on file (most formats are
accepted).
Ships length between perpendiculars (Lpp).
Ships breadth (moulded).
Draft mark positions (see below).
Sensor coordinates.
Ullage reference height (for ullage measuring tanks).
Drafts are normally corrected to:
Forward sensor, to FP at centreline.
Aft sensor, to AP at centreline.
Port sensor, to Lpp/2 at ship side port.
Starboard sensor, to Lpp/2 at ship side starboard.

Note

Draft may alternatively be corrected to draft marks fore, aft,


port and starboard. In this case draft mark positions measured
forward AP must be supplied.

A more detailed description on handling the different table types


and data is given in the document AO-11642. This document
describes tank52.dat and tankcalc.ini files. It also describes
different calculation procedures depending on the supplied data.

313545/A

K-Chief 500

2 CAPACITY TABLES
Capacity tables are tables with LCF and TCF (surface data)
given in tables. LCF and TCF are longitudinal and transverse
coordinates for Centre of Flotation. For a certain filling level,
level in Centre of Flotation, does not change when the ship is
trimming/heeling. The tables should be valid for list = 0.0 deg.
Tables should start at the lowest point of the tank (volume = 0.0
m3), and the last level should be at 100% filling. In case of
ullage measuring, the last level must correspond to ullage
reference height. This level is added when data for ullage
reference point is received.
The levels may be levels from the lowest point of the tank, or
levels from the baseline.
In case of ullage measuring, as mentioned above, the last level
in the table must be the ullage reference height level. If ullage
reference height is adjusted, only the level in the last line in the
tank table may be corrected. New ullage tables are not required.

313545/A

Tank Tables and Data

A capacity table used in Tank52.dat file may look like:


NO.1 C.O.TK(S)
LEVEL

VOLUME

LCF

TCF

##CAPACITY TABLES
## 1
#

0.000

0.0 62.080

4.490

0.500

47.7 62.080

4.490

1.000

102.9 62.300

4.520

1.500

163.1 62.490

4.570

2.000

228.5 62.650

4.620

# 29 14.000 2410.7 63.140

4.670

# 30 14.500 2485.4 63.060

4.530

# 31 15.000 2556.5 63.010

4.490

# 32 15.500 2626.2 63.650

3.960

# 33 15.701 2643.6 63.650

3.960

# 34 16.500 2643.6 63.650

3.960 //Ullage ref. height

In case of ullage measuring of a tank, it is important that ullage


reference height above the lowest point of the tank or above the
baseline is supplied.
For this table type, sensor coordinates (longitudinal and
transverse) must be supplied in order to calculate long-distance
from sensor to LCF, and transverse distance from sensor to
TCF.
LCF should be given forward/aft of AP or Lpp/2 and TCF from
centreline (negative to port and positive to starboard).

313545/A

K-Chief 500

The table are only valid for trim = 0.00 m and list = 0.00 deg.
The level must therefore be corrected for trim and list in order to
find the level at even keel (level in Centre of Flotation). Then
with the even keel level, the capacity table may be entered in
order to calculate actual volume.
If no LCF/TCF data is given, we may use LCG/TCG (Centre of
Gravity) data. Thus level will be corrected to level at Centre of
Gravity for actual volume. If the shape of the tank makes the
level at Centre of Gravity differ considerably from the level at
Centre of Floatation, the volume calculation from the tables may
be wrong. This calculation method is therefore not
recommended.

313545/A

Tank Tables and Data

3 TRIM TABLES
In order to calculate a trim table, a sounding pipe must be
defined. Different sounding pipe gives different trim tables. The
trim tables give volumes for a number of trim values for a
certain sounding. Sounding is the length measured along the
sounding pipe from bottom of sounding pipe to liquid surface.
The sounding pipe defined for a supplied trim table must be a
vertical pipe without knuckles as the sensor is measuring a
vertical level (pressure). The pipe must be defined at sensor
longitudinal (and transverse) position.
The start of the sounding pipe should preferably be lowest point
of tank (not sensor vertical position), and extended well above
tank top. The sensor fitting height above lowest point of tank
(offset) is added in software.
Trim table to be valid for list = 0.00 deg.
Note

Trim tables for any other sounding pipes than mention above
may not be used (as for instance tables for sounding pipe
actually fitted).

If possible TCF should be given in the table. In this case


transverse position of sensor is required.
If TCF is not given, transverse distance from sensor to TCF
should be given at 2 different levels. Else list correction is not
performed.

313545/A

K-Chief 500

A trim table used in Tank52.dat file may look like:


Water ballast

Fore peak lower

Frames: 216 - 244


TRIM :
LEVEL

-1.0

0.0

1.0

2.0

4.0

********** VOLUMES [m3] ******

LCF

TCF

[m]

[m]

##CAPACITY TABLES
## 1
#

0.000

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0 0.000 0.000

1.430

14.0

13.7

13.4

13.1

12.6 0.000 0.000

1.530

16.3

16.0

15.7

15.3

14.8 0.000 0.000

1.630

18.8

18.5

18.1

17.8

17.1 0.000 0.000

1.730

21.6

21.1

20.7

20.3

19.6 0.000 0.000

1.830

24.4

24.0

23.5

23.1

22.3 0.000 0.000

1.930

27.5

27.0

26.5

26.1

25.2 0.000 0.000

2.030

30.7

30.2

29.7

29.2

28.2 0.000 0.000

2.130

34.1

33.5

33.0

32.5

31.4 0.000 0.000

# 123 13.530

954.1

953.3

952.5

951.8

950.4 0.000 0.000

# 124 13.630

964.6

963.7

962.9

962.2

960.8 0.000 0.000

# 125 13.730

975.3

974.4 973. 6

972.8

971.4 0.000 0.000

# 126 13.830

986.2

985.3

984.4

983.6

982.2 0.000 0.000

# 127 13.930

997.2

996.3

995.4

994.6

993.1 0.000 0.000

# 128 14.030 1008.4 1007.4 1006.6 1005.7 1004.2 0.000 0.000


# 129 14.130 1019.7 1018.8 1017.9 1017.0 1015.4 0.000 0.000
# 130 14.230 1029.2 1029.3 1028.5 1027.2 1024.7 0.000 0.000
# 131 14.330 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1028.8 0.000 0.000
# 132 14.430 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 0.000 0.000
# 133 14.530 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 0.000 0.000
# 134 14.630 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 0.000 0.000

10

313545/A

Tank Tables and Data

In the table above, volumes are given for trim = -1.0, 0.0, 1.0,
2.0 and 4.0 m. Negative values indicates trim by bow, positive
trim by stern. If opposite sign convention is used in supplied
tables, we will convert them.
TCF is not given (should preferable be given). LCF has no
relevance.
Negative values indicate trim by bow; positive values indicate
trim by stern. If opposite sign convention is used in supplied
tables, we will convert them,
The levels should extend well above tank top so that all volumes
at the last line in the table are equal to maximum volume.
In case of ullage measuring for a tank, it is important that ullage
reference height above lowest point of tank or above baseline is
supplied. This ullage reference height should be the last level in
the table. See example above (capacity table).

313545/A

11

CHAPTER 2

Radar

GLA-300

UNIT PROPERTIES:
Weight: 11.7kg
Protection: IP68
Materials: AISI 316 and PTFE
Ex class: Ex ia IIC T4

45

Flange type, code E

124

287

272
208

E plane

320

280

F
E
A

Flexible protection tube

N
P

Trondheim
Project number

Merchant Marine Division

Designed by

Checked by

GL-2661

DIMENSIONAL SKETCH

Radar Tank Gauge


GLA-300/P series types
Ordering code information
and main dimension.
Drawing type

Title

AAS/JSR
AAS
AAS

KSI
KSI
HJH

A3

Revision

1: 4

Scale

Size

1 of 1

Sheet

Approved by

JIS B2220 5K A200 (standard)


Kongsberg (refit)
J
R

STS
ASD
STP

Flange type
E

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

DESCRIPTION

8.0 - 15.0
12.5 - 20.5
17.0 - 25.5

Protection tube adapters will be included


according to choosen gland type code (B and C).

Remarks

Flexible protection tube type GL-1389/FR has to be ordered separately.


For assembly see drawing 369735

No protection tube

Blind plug
M20
M25
M32
0
1
2
3

Cable protection type

Gland type

C (right inlet)

8.0 - 15.0
12.5 - 20.5
17.0 - 25.5

Blind plug
M20
M25
M32
0
1
2
3

Cable dim.

Cable dim.

No pressure sensor
0.8 - 1.4 bar
0.8 - 1.8 bar

Gland type

0
1
2

B (left inlet)

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

Crude/Product/Chemical
Chemical, spec. requirement

Apllies to

Type codes ABCDE for GLA-300/xABCDE


Pressure range
A

AISI316
AISI316 with Mo > 2.5 %

Material type

06.05.2013 Text update


09.12.2011 Flange type , code E, added to view. D in Doc. ID removed.
30.09.2010 First release

Project / Product name

REV.

8 x 23

22.5
45

Offset Parabolic antenna


Offset Parabolic antenna

GLA-300/P
GLA-300/PC

H plane

Sensor type

GLA-300/x

Sensor type code x for GLA-300/xABCDE:

GLA-300/P series Radar Tank Gauge type code and main dimensions.

Main dimensions ( 1 : 4 )

Gland size, code B


Left inlet

Optional
protection tube
adapters, code D

Right inlet
Gland size, code C

10

1:5

34

n316 `2
n280 `1

n25 `1

0.5

n204 `2

3
2
1
ITEM
C
B
A

1 JIS B2220 200 Full Face Gasket


1 JIS B2220 200 Full Face Gasket
1 JIS B2220 200 Full Face Gasket
QTY
DESCRIPTION

UY-149-3
UY-149-2
UY-149-1
PART NUMBER
Parts List

02.11.2010 Added Novaflon 300 option


07.12.2009 Added Goretex option
2009-10-19 First edition

REV.

DATE

Material:

DESCRIPTION

See remark

AAS
Reidar
STS

Reidar
AAS
STP

Designed by

Checked by

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Surface treatment:

Surface: Ra 3,2

Merchant Marine Division


GL-300

Approved by

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

JIS B2220 5K 200 Full Face Gasket


for GLA-300 socket

Sheet
Size

A4
Scale

Trondheim
Project / Product name

KSI
HJH
KSI

Threads: 6g/6H

Title

Kongsberg Maritime AS

novaflon 300
Goretex
Nitril
MATERIAL

1:2
Project number

Drawing type

DIMENSION SKETCH

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

UY-149

Cable support

Project number

GL-2630

Approved by

KM/YS
YS
YS
YS
YS
YS
YS
YS
KM
SUPPLIER
KSI
HJH

A3

Revision

1:4

Scale

Size

1 of 1

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

Installation of GLA-300/P
on Tank Socket

Threads: 6g/6H

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Drawing type
The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Designed by

Surface treatment:

DESCRIPTION

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

DATE

MATERIAL
BEL
AAS
STP
AAS

novaflon300
Tank compatible

A4
A4
A4
A4

Material:

REV.

9
4 Serrated Lock Washer
M20 (UTN267/G)
8
6 Spring Washer DIN 127
M20 (UTN025/F)
7
8 Hex Nut DIN 934/DIN EN 24032
M20 (UTN026/H)
6
8 Hex-Head Bolt DIN 933/ISO 4017
M20x65 (UTN014/D65 )
5
1 Cable for Temperature Sensors
4
1 GLA-300 Main Cable
3
1 JIS B2220 200 Full Face Gasket
UY-149-3
2
1 Tank Socket
GL-2522
1
1 RTG unit GLA-300
GLA-300/P
ITEM QTY
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
Washers
(9),
gasket
(3),
tank
socket
and
edited
text
B
2012-05-23
A 2010-06-09 Released

Serrated Lock Washers, item 9, under bolt head and under nut
on the 2 bolts closest to the main cable connection.

Installations utilizing Flexible Protection Hoses:


Cable supports are unnecessary and shall be omitted when making
Tank Socket GL-2522.
See Drawing GL-2618/19/20/21 regarding Flexible Protection Hoses
bend radii and mounting dimensions.
See Drawing GL-2626 regarding assembly of cable glands
and Flexible Protection Hoses.

Installations not utilizing Flexible Protection Hoses:


Cable supports are needed when making Tank Socket GL-2522.
See Drawing GL-2581 regarding cabling details.

Connection method of Main Cable is shown in Installation Manual


and in DRAWING GL-2631.
Connection method of Cable for Temperature Sensors is likewise.

Socket drawing

170

418

280

320

177,5

50

23 x 8

Gasket area

45x8

22,5
45

Flange: See comment 9

Min. 8.2mm see comment 4

A= 500,0min - 800max

Max. 220

Min. 199

90

"D"
210
220
229

Free hole dia.


100
100
4"(100)

DATE

GL-2522

AAS
ASD
STP
Checked by

STS
STS
STS
Designed by

GL-2522

Dimensional sketch

Drawing type

Radar Tank Gauging System

Socket for GLA-300

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime

GL-300

Project number / Item ID

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Project / Product name

Material:

DESCRIPTION

27.02.2013 Ttle field and comment 8 text changed.


05.03.2012 Comments 9 added
01.12.2008 First edition
See comment 1 and 2
Surface treatment: See comment 2

REV.

E
D
A

9. Flange type (standard): JIS B2220 size 200 5k.

1:5

A3

Revision

Scale

Size

1 of 1

Approved by

KSI
KSI
HBE

Sheet

8. Cable guides is optional recommendable in installations without cable protection (flexible protection tubes).

On "Arctic-/ Ice Class" it is highly recommended.

7: Jet-Nozzle is optional and not part of the socket.

areas.

6. Socket coating/painting: According to shipyard spesifications for equipment on weather deck and cargo exposed

5: See dwg. GL-2521 for weldings/assembly.

-ANSI DN8", Schedule 40

-JIS, DN200, Schedule 40

4. Use standard pipes: -DIN, DN 200, Schedule 40

3: Weight: Appr. 30 - 40[kg]. Depending on socket height.

Storing and transportational coating for all materials except AISI 316L: HEMPELS SHOPPRIMER ZS 1589 or equal.

Beyond that: Material must always be equal to, or better than, tank/deck and/or according to spesification.

2. Material of all metallic parts with reference to: API 5LB PSL1/ASTM A53B.

1. Material bolts, nuts and washers: AISI 316

COMMENTS:

Standard option
"C"
A: JIS 10K 100
175
B: DIN PN10 100 180
C: ANSI 150LB 4" 191

"Inspection hatch table" with plane welding flange and standard


gasket (material depending on cargo), 3 options:

Free hole dia. See inspection hatch table.

Cable guides optional dependant on installation method.


See COMM.8.

Hole ISO 228-G3/8 for Jet-Nozzle(OPTIONAL)


see COMM.7.

"C" see inspection hatch table


"D" see inspection hatch table

For installation with flex. Prot. Tubes

1
2

M20x1.5

M32x1.5

1
1
1
1
1
QTY

Trondheim
Project number

ASSEMBLY DRAWING

GL-2606

HJH
Approved by

A3

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

1 of 3

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

AAS

AISI 316L
Welded AISI 316L
MATERIAL

AISI 316

Installation utilizing Protection Hose


on Radar Tank Gauge
for cable 8-15 mm
(GL-2606/1)
Drawing type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Threads: 6g/6H

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Designed by

Surface: Ra 3,2

DESCRIPTION

Surface treatment:

DATE
Material:

REV.

Wrench size 42 mm

Protection Hose
GL-1387
Adapter type GL-2604/1
GL-2604/1
329245
Gland M20x1.5 Cable 8-15
Reduction Nipple M32x1.5 to M20x1.5
346331
GLA-300 Housing Nipple M32
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
Parts List
STP
21.04.2010 First release

5
4
3
2
1
ITEM

B-B ( 1 : 2 )

Wrench size 32 mm

G 3/4-14

Protection hose venting holes down after mounting

A-A ( 1 : 2 )

Wrench size 24 mm

M42x1.5

M42x1.5

F-F ( 1 : 2 )

Wrench size 42 mm

Wrench size 46 mm

G 1 1/4-11

Trondheim
Project number

Threads: 6g/6H

ASSEMBLY DRAWING

GL-2606

HJH
Approved by

A3

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

3 of 3

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

AAS

AISI 316
A4
Welded AISI 316L
MATERIAL

Installation utilizing Protection Hose


on Radar Tank Gauge
for cable 17.0-25.5 mm
(GL-2606/3)
Drawing type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

STP
Designed by
Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

DESCRIPTION

Surface: Ra 3,2

First release

PART NUMBER

Surface treatment:

DATE

Parts List

GL-1389
GL-2604/3
346329

Material:

21.04.2010

Protection hose
Adapter type GL-2604/3
Gland M32x1.5 Cable 17.0-25.5
GLA-300 Housing Nipple M32
DESCRIPTION
A

1
1
1
1
QTY

REV.

4
3
2
1
ITEM

Protection hose venting holes down after mounting

E-E ( 1 : 2 )

Wrench size 36 mm

M32x1.5

M42x1.5

R240

R130

R240

500

R130
25

226

345

440

141

25

260

468

384

~50

340

GL-1389

GLA-300

UP-663

Note 1

Note 2

GL-1389 (KMK Supply)

GL-1387 (KMK Supply)

Protection hose for main cable connection


Illustration is done with GL-1389 having a minimum
bending radius for hose centerline equal to R=240 mm.
Smaller radii is not recommended.
45 degree bends are used in this illustration.
Hose insert in couplings is 25 mm.
Shortest possible hose length (hose) is:
Lh = 25+R* /4+R* /4+25= 426 mm
Shortest possible GL-1389 total length (incl. couplings):
Lt = Lh+2*39.5 = 505 mm

Protection hose for temperature cable connection


Illustration is done with GL-1387 having a minimum
bending radius for hose centerline equal to R=130 mm.
Smaller radii is not recommended.
90 degree bends are used in this illustration.
Hose insert in couplings is 25 mm.
Shortest possible hose length (hose) is:
Lh = 25+R* /2+R* /2+25= 458 mm
Shortest possible GL-1387 total length (incl. couplings):
Lt = Lh+2*37 = 532 mm

Distance to deck in illustration is 345 mm (with tank


socket mounted as shown).
If a shorter distance to deck is used, increase the
hose length relative to 345 mm.

Distance to deck in illustration is 226 mm (with tank


socket mounted as shown).
If a shorter distance to deck is used, increase the
hose length relative to 226 mm.

Illustration shows shortest possible distances in X, Y and 45 degrees to X direction of the


protection hoses and deck pipe flanges. Cable bends are consequently 90 degrees.
If a longer distance from the sensor vertical centerline to the pipe flange is required, increase the hose length relative
to the distances given in the drawing for x, y, and 45 degrees from x direction of the hose.
If distance between cable pipe centerlines deviates from the dimensions given for the shortest possible hoses
in the illustration, additional hose bending is required. The hose length must then be individually calculated
in each case.

UP-661

If distances to deck pipe flanges are larger than the distances given in the drawing, bends below 90 degrees
can be used. The hose length must then be individually calculated in each case.

GL-1387

Y
X

Note 1 (Main cable connection):


Cable Gland combination for cable 17.0-25.5 mm.
See Drawing GL-2606 Sheet 3 of 3 for details.

B
A

2011-10-13 Changed radius to R240 & R130


25.05.2010 First release

REV.

Cable Gland combination for cable 8.0-15.0 mm.


See Drawing GL-2606 Sheet 1 of 3 for details.

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Surface treatment:

Surface: Ra 3,2

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Merchant Marine Division
Trondheim
Project / Product name

GL-300

Designed by

DESCRIPTION

Material:

Note 2 (Temperature cable connection):

Configuration with interchanged main and temperature


cable connection shown in drawing GL-2621.

DATE

ABL
STP

Project number

STS/AAS
AAS
Checked by

KSI
HJH
Approved by

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Threads: 6g/6H

Title

Sheet

GLA-300 Protection Hoses Dimensions 1 of 1


GLA-300 Housing with 2 M32 inlets Size
A2
GL-1389 1 1/4" hose on main cable Scale
GL-1387 3/4" hose on temp. cable
1:5

Drawing type

INSTALLATION DRAWING

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

GL-2620

25

141

R240
25
R130

25

500

R130
25

226

345

440

R240

260
340
468

~50

384

GLA-300

GL-1387

GL-1389 (KMK Supply)

GL-1387 (KMK Supply)

Protection hose for main cable connection


Illustration is done with GL-1389 having a minimum
bending radius for hose centerline equal to R=240 mm.
Smaller radii is not recommended.
45 degree bends are used in this illustration.
Hose insert in couplings is 25 mm.
Shortest possible hose length (hose) is:
Lh = 25+R* /4+R* /4+25= 426 mm
Shortest possible GL-1389 total length (incl. couplings):
Lt = Lh+2*39.5 = 505 mm

Protection hose for temperature cable connection


Illustration is done with GL-1387 having a minimum
bending radius for hose centerline equal to R=130 mm.
Smaller radii is not recommended.
90 degree bends are used in this illustration.
Hose insert in couplings is 25 mm.
Shortest possible hose length (hose) is:
Lh = 25+R* /2+R* /2+25= 348.5 mm
Shortest possible GL-1387 total length (incl. couplings):
Lt = Lh+2*37 = 422.5 mm

Distance to deck in illustration is 345 mm (with tank


socket mounted as shown).
If a shorter distance to deck is used, increase the
hose length relative to 345 mm.

Distance to deck in illustration is 295.5 mm (with tank


socket mounted as shown).
If a shorter distance to deck is used, increase the
hose length equal to the reduction relative to 295.5 mm.

UP-661
Note 2

Note 1

Illustration shows shortest possible distances in X, Y and 45 degrees to X direction of the


protection hoses and deck pipe flanges. Cable bends are consequently 90 degrees.

GL-1389

If a longer distance from the sensor vertical centerline to the pipe flange is required, increase the hose length relative
to the distances given in the drawing for x, y, and 45 degrees from x direction of the hose.

UP-663

If distance between cable pipe centerlines deviates from the dimensions given for the shortest possible hoses
in the illustration, additional hose bending is required. The hose length must then be individually calculated
in each case.
If distances to deck pipe flanges are larger than the distances given in the drawing, bends below 90 degrees
can be used. The hose length must then be individually calculated in each case.

Y
X

Note 1 (Main cable connection):


Cable Gland combination for cable 17.0-25.5 mm.
See Drawing GL-2606 Sheet 3 of 3 for details.

B
A

2011-10-13 Changed Radius to R240 & R130


25.05.2010 First release

REV.

Cable Gland combination for cable 8.0-15.0 mm.


See Drawing GL-2606 Sheet 1 of 3 for details.

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Surface treatment:

Surface: Ra 3,2

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Merchant Marine Division
Trondheim
Project / Product name

GL-300

Designed by

DESCRIPTION

Material:

Note 2 (Temperature cable connection):

Configuration with interchanged main and temperature


cable connection shown in drawing GL-2620.

DATE

ABL
STP

Project number

STS/AAS
AAS
Checked by

KSI
HJH
Approved by

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Threads: 6g/6H

Title

Sheet

GLA-300 Protection Hoses Dimensions 1 of 1


GLA-300 Housing with 2 M32 inlets Size
A2
GL-1389 1 1/4" hose on main cable Scale
GL-1387 3/4" hose on temp. cable
1:5

Drawing type

INSTALLATION DRAWING

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

GL-2621

Common radar installation drawings

CHAPTER 3

Pressure

Atmospheric pressure measurement


- Indoor mounting -

Outdoor area

8. Total weight KM supply: Approx. 0.85 kg.

7. Make sure that cable and gland fit together. Outer rubber
shield on cable must pass the inlet of the gland.
Tighten the gland with a torque of 7-10 Nm.

6. Installation kit (2): GT-2092


- Clamp (2a) (Polyamid)
- Manometer coupling (2b) (Brass)
- 8x1 copper tube (1.5 m) (2c) (Copper)

5. The cover (5) must be installed to stabilize, and to prevent wind


and weather to influence on atmospheric pressure on pipe inlet.

4. The nameplate (3) must be placed nearby the ATM


pressure transmitter where it is easily visible.

3. The ATM pressure transmitter has protection grade IP 66/67.

2. The pressure transmitter can be mounted directly on the wall


in the cargo control room.

1. Pressure Transmitter must be installed vertically.

REMARKS:

Indoor area

A-A

4.2
Clamp hole

M20
7-12

M20+
10-14

M25
13-18

DESCRIPTION

Project number

Designed by

Checked by

GT-2090

SYSTEM LAY-OUT

Drawing type

Atmospheric pressure measurement.


Pressure transmitter mounted indoor
with atmospheric pressure pipe.

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Level and pressure measurem.

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

A3

Revision

1:3

Scale

Size

1 of 1

Sheet

Approved by

YARD SUPPLY
YARD SUPPLY
KM
Brass NiCr
See Remark 6 KM
KM
AISI 316
MATERIAL
SUPPLIER
ASD
RHH
MGJ
HJH
BEL
RHH
HJH
RHH
HBE
HBE
STS
RHH

Cable gland (Rem. 7)

1 Weather protection
1 Fastening screws
1 Nameplate
E-2660
1 Inst. kit atmospheric pressure transmitter
GT-2092
1 Pressure transmitter
GT402A_C0,6V
PART NUMBER
QTY
DESCRIPTION
2012-06-11 Partlist updated, matr. added. Remark 8 changed.
2011-11-03 Added nameplate and remark 2-3.
2011-06-28 Rem. pos.2. Added comm. rem. 3.
2011-03-08 Released

Project / Product name

REV.

5
4
3
2
1
ITEM
E
D
C
A

For cable

Cable gland

2c

2b

2a

Ballast pump discharge line pressure


measurement

KONGSBERG MARITIME
SCOPE OF SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

Tank wall

10

11

Tank bottom

12

A(1:2)

1. Ensure that the cable between pressure transmitter and connection box is
not strained after installation.
2. Install cables according to drawing 359481 and installation guide E-2709.
The specified torques are maximum value for compression gland nuts.
3. Material and installation of yard supplied parts must be according to ship and
classification society requirements.
4. At new design use:
Discharge side: GT403A0H10D (approx. 0-10 bar atm.) with a shock absorber in front.
Suction side: GT403A0A10D (approx. -1-9 bar atm.) with a shock absorber in front.
Shock absorber: GT-1244/3.
(This combination of shock absorber and upgraded sensing element can
withstand higher pressure spikes)
5. At spare or retrofit, use the same range and zero point as originally installed, but
with a shock absorber in front acc. to doc. GT-1455. The D-type with
front adapter in Titanium is recommended.
This recommendation is valid for GT402xxxD and GT403xxxD types.
6. Total weight KM supply: Approx. 2.6 kg + PUR cable 0.04 kg/m.

REMARKS:

15

14

13

Tank deck

Clamp nut
Torque 10 Nm
20
1

FULL INSTALLATION

Hex-Head Bolt DIN 931/ISO 4014

4
1
1

13
12
11

1
1
1
1

6
5
4
3

Connection box

Flange with PUR cable

UG-917

DESCRIPTION

Project number

Designed by

Checked by

GT-2047

Document ID

SYSTEM LAY-OUT

Drawing type

Ballast pump suction/discharge line


Submerged
UG-917 weather proof
connection box, IP66/67

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Part No.
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Level and pressure measurem.

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

Project / Product name

REV.

KM

A3

Revision

1:15

Scale

Size

1 of 1

Sheet

Approved by

KM
AISI 316L
Titanium
KM
Titanium
KM
MATERIAL
SUPPLIER
ASD
RHH
MGJ
HBE
ASD
RHH

AISI 316

KM

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

Ballast pipe
Adapter ISO228-G1/2

YARD SUPPLY

Rubber protection

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

Protection pipe suspension

Titanium

Nitril

YARD SUPPLY

GT-1504/-

359218 (optional)

16

C(1:3)

Cable protection pipe

76.3 mm Pipe DN65

Standard flange JIS65 B 2220 K5 SOP

2
1
Shock absorber
GT-1244/3
1b
1
Pressure transmitter (discharge)
GT403A0H___D
1a
1
Pressure transmitter (suction)
GT403A0A___D
ITEM QTY
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
PUR
cable
and
partlist
updated.
Remark
6 added.
2012-06-22
B
A 2011-08-30 First release

Spring Washer DIN 127

14

10

Hex Nut DIN 934/DIN EN 24032

15

Gasket JIS65

PTFE tape

Gland nut
Torque 2 Nm

Gland nut
Torque 5 Nm

16

B(1:3)

Approx. 147

Min. 114

89

130
15
155

Gland for cable:

M30x1.5

4-6

8-15

DESCRIPTION

Project number

Designed by

BEL
STS

Checked by

ASD
RHH

Connection box for level and


pressure measurement.
Top mounted installation.
IP67, JIS 65 5K interface.

UG-917

DIMENSIONAL SKETCH

Drawing type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

2012-07-05 Added thread dimension and remark 1


2010-09-28 Released

Project / Product name

REV.

B
A

Technical data:
Material: AISI 316
Protection: IP66/67
Weight: 2 kg

A(1:2)

Remarks:
1. Flexible protection tube: Adapter GL-2519 added
for use with flexible protection tube GL-1387
2. Assembly drawing: UG-918

Gland for cable:

34

10

81

A3

Revision

1:1

Scale

Size

1 of 1

Sheet

Approved by

MGJ
HBE

GT403

GT402

Shock absorber installation:


1. Apply PTFE-tape on shock absorber threads [1].
2. Install in ballast pipe adapter (70 Nm) [2].
3. Apply PTFE-tape on transmitter front threads [3].
4. Install transmitter in shock absorber (70 Nm).
C
B
A
REV.

04.09.2012 Flange with PUR cable updated. Text updated.


10.08.2010 Make-up torque changed.
22.01.2008 Released
DATE

DESCRIPTION

ASD
STS
STS

RHH
RHH
-

Designed by

Checked by

Title

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Mechant Marine Division
Trondheim
Project / Product name

Project number / Item ID

MGJ
HBE
KJA
Approved by
Sheet

Installation of shock absorber GT-1244/3

1 of 1
Size

for transm. type GT402...D and GT403...D


in ballast pump suction/discharge systems

A4
Scale

1:3

Drawing type

Installation Drawing

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime

Revision

GT-1455

Black -

Red +

2x0.24mm

Conductors with colours blue


and white shall not be connected.
5

REMARKS:
1. Replaces GT-1234.
2. Materials:
Flange: Titanium grade 2
Cable: Polyurethane
O-ring: Viton
3. Protection grade w/
pressure transmitter: IP68 - 6bar
4. Weight: 40g + 40g/m
5. Insulation resistance > 1500 M x km
at 3kV DC and 20 C.
6. Service temperature: -20 to 80 C.
7. M4 unbraco screws delivered with
pressure transmitter.
8. Limited use submerged in chemicals
due to viton tube.

55

CL

4x 5

ORDERING EXAMPLE: GT-1504/350


Black Mechanical design
Total length, CL[dm]
Standard length: 50, 100, 150, 200
250, 300, 350, 400
450, 500, 600

24.7
40
48

B
A
REV.

26.02.2013 Added remark 8 and changed lenght of protection tube


12.04.2012 First release
DATE

DESCRIPTION

AMG
ASD

RHH
RHH

Designed by

Checked by

Title

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Merchant Marine Division
Trondheim
Project / Product name

Project number / Item ID

GT-1504/-

MGJ
MGJ
Approved by
Sheet

Flange with PUR cable

1 of 1
Size

Type GT-1504/For pressure transmitter GT403

A4
Scale

1:1

Drawing type

Dimensional Sketch

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime

Revision

GT-1504

+24VDC
Iout
0V

Optional:
Use the KM Zener barrier
DZ-110 if transmitter is
installed in hazardous area.

1 2 3
Zener
barrier
DZ-110
4 5 6

IS-bar

Safe area
Hazardous area
Connection
box UG-917

1
GND

3
Encl. /GND

Pressure Transmitters
GT4XX-series

C
B
A
REV.

2012-09-05 Conn. (sheet 1) & Flange with PURcable (sheet 2) updated.


2011-10-31 Earthing on sheet 1 (4) updated
2011-05-13 Released
DATE

Designed by

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Merchant Marine Division

ASD
ASD
ASD

Title

Checked by

Cable and screen connection


for connection box UG-917

MGJ
HJH
HBE
Approved by
Sheet

1(4)
Size

A4
Scale

Trondheim
Project / Product name

RHH
RHH
RHH

Project number

Drawing type

INSTALLATION DRAWING
The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

359481

Press down with a


screw driver to open terminal

GT402
GT404
GT422

+ 1 2

Top view of
pressure transmitter.
Top cover removed.

Bend outer screen of cable back


O-ring
Screened cable

PUR cable

GT403
GT423

Plug connector
"A"

"A"

SEEN FROM "A"


O-ring

C
B
A
REV.

2012-09-05 Conn. (sheet 1) & Flange with PURcable (sheet 2) updated.


2011-10-31 Earthing on sheet 1 (4) updated
2011-05-13 Released
DATE

Designed by

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Merchant Marine Division

ASD
ASD
ASD

Title

Checked by

Cable and screen connection


for connection box UG-917

MGJ
HJH
HBE
Approved by
Sheet

2(4)
Size

A4
Scale

Trondheim
Project / Product name

RHH
RHH
RHH

Project number

Drawing type

INSTALLATION DRAWING
The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

359481

1. Strip the cable

Screen

Sheat

27 mm

2. Tape the screen before inserting the cable


Tape

3. If outer diameter of cable is larger than the inner ring of the gland gasket,
remove the inner ring. Do not add any additional tape or sealing as the
gasket will be sqeezed and sealed around the cable when the gland is
tightened. Insert the cable until the sheat is aligned with the inner edge of
the gland. Remove the tape.
Inner ring
Outer ring
gland gasket

gland gasket

Align

4. Tighten the gland nut so the gasket is tight, see detail on Sheet 4 of 4.
Fold the cable screen back distributed evenly over the gland inner surface,
and fasten the screen clamp.

C
B
A
REV.

2012-09-05 Conn. (sheet 1) & Flange with PURcable (sheet 2) updated.


2011-10-31 Earthing on sheet 1 (4) updated
2011-05-13 Released
DATE

Designed by

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Merchant Marine Division

ASD
ASD
ASD

Title

Checked by

Cable and screen connection


for connection box UG-917

MGJ
HJH
HBE
Approved by
Sheet

3(4)
Size

A4
Scale

Trondheim
Project / Product name

RHH
RHH
RHH

Project number

Drawing type

INSTALLATION DRAWING
The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

359481

Tighten the compression nut according to torque given


in table below, or until the gland gasket protrudes slightly
over the compression nut, see illustration.

CORRECT

INCORRECT

Gland sizes/torque
Thread (M)
M10x1.5
M20x1.5
M25x1.5
M32x1.5

C
B
A
REV.

Range(mm)
4-6
8-15
12.5-20
17-25.5

Torque(NM)
2
5
7
6

2012-09-05 Conn. (sheet 1) & Flange with PURcable (sheet 2) updated.


2011-10-31 Earthing on sheet 1 (4) updated
2011-05-13 Released
DATE

Designed by

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Merchant Marine Division

ASD
ASD
ASD

Title

Checked by

Cable and screen connection


for connection box UG-917

MGJ
HJH
HBE
Approved by
Sheet

4(4)
Size

A4
Scale

Trondheim
Project / Product name

RHH
RHH
RHH

Project number

Drawing type

INSTALLATION DRAWING
The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

359481

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR GT402 AND GT403

KONGSBERG

IMPORTANT
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS OF GT402

Do NOT install Pressure Transmitter against housing/T-piece filled with cargo/liquid. Remove
the liquid, trying to compress liquid may cause overpressure to the transmitter.

Top cover
Cable gland/connection box

Close valve

Remove liquid to get air in.


Housing/T-piece

1. Close the valve.


2. Dismount the old transmitter. Check that the T-piece/valve not is clogged. Put a finger or
object into the hole where the old transmitter was placed, and remove some liquid in order
to get air in. Use proper safety equipment if cargo is harmful.
3. Mount the new transmitter with a torque of 70-90 Nm. The transmitter must be installed
within 30 degrees from vertical line.
4. Remove the top cover. Remove black protecting plug from the cable gland and install
cable. Make sure that cable/gland fit together. Outer rubber shield on cable must pass the
inlet of the gland. Tighten the gland with a torque of 7-10Nm to ensure a watertight
connection. Connect the power lines with respective + to pos 1 and - to pos 2 + -

Be careful so you dont get liquid or dirt into the connection box during installation.
Replace the top cover immediately and tighten with a torque of 5-7 Nm.
5. Now you can open the valve.

! Warranty will not be valid if installation is done incorrectly!


ATEX Related Document:
All Changes must be approved by ATEX responsible person before taking effect. E-2709/A

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR GT402 AND GT403

KONGSBERG

IMPORTANT
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS OF GT403WITH PUR CABLE

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the red protecting cap.


Put the o-ring into its groove.
Connect the electrical socket to the transmitter (only fits one way).
Make sure that the red and black cables are not squeezed between the transmitter and
flange.
5. Tighten the 4 bolts using a 4mm hexagonal key with a torque of 4Nm.
6. The GT403 N-type with drainage hole is only for submerged installations.
Mounting sequence:

Drainage hole

Beware so the cable is not squeezed between the transmitter and flange

Electrical socket connection


Welding bracket

O-ring into groove


4 hexagonal bolts tighten with 4Nm

! Warranty will not be valid if installation is done incorrectly!


ATEX Related Document:
All Changes must be approved by ATEX responsible person before taking effect. E-2709/A

For installation with flex. Prot. Tubes

Wrench size 24 mm

1
2

M20x1.5

G 3/4-14

Wrench size 32 mm
Wrench size 35 mm

D-D ( 1 : 2 )

Trondheim
Project number

Threads: 6g/6H

ASSEMBLY DRAWING

GL-2626

HJH
Approved by

A3

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

2 of 2

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

AAS

Welded AISI 316L


MATERIAL

AISI 316

Installation utilizing Protection Hose


on Radar Tank Gauge with M20 Nipple
for cable 8-15 mm
(GL-2626/2)
Drawing type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

STP
Designed by

Surface: Ra 3,2

DESCRIPTION

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

First release

PART NUMBER

Surface treatment:

DATE

Parts List

GL-1387
GL-2519
329245

Material:

08.06.2010

Protection Hose
Protection hose adapter GL-1387
Gland M20x1.5 Cable 8-15
GLA-300 Housing Nipple M20
DESCRIPTION
A

1
1
1
1
QTY

REV.

4
3
2
1
ITEM

Protection hose venting holes downwards after mounting

C-C ( 1 : 2 )

M30x1.5

59

1x45

24.0 +- 0.0
0.3

A-A

1x45

32 +- 0.0
0.3

1x45

G 3/4-14 - A

17

28.5

22

C(5:1)

2
1x45

30

Project / Product name

GL-2519

Project number / Item ID

GL-2519

Detail Drawing

Drawing type

for Radar Tank Gauge

Inside M30 to outside G 3/4"

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime

GL300

Sheet

A3

1 of 1

Revision

1,5 : 1

Scale

Threads: 6g/6H

Mechant Marine Division


Trondheim

Adapter type GL-2519

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Approved by

KSI
HBE
Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

Designed by
Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Size

DESCRIPTION

ASD
STP

BEL
STS

D(4:1)

VIEW2 ( 1 : 1 )

Kongsberg Maritime AS

AISI 316

DATE

2012-10-23 Extended length of threads, new frame and title field.


2008-11-19 Released

Surface treatment:

Material:

REV.

B
A

Remarks:
Remove all burrs.

M30x1.5

B-B

13

24

35

12

10
2

Cargo manifold line pressure


measurement

118

SW 27

98

Cable gland
For cable

A(1:1)

M20
7-12

O-ring

M20+
10-14

Scale 1:4

60

DESCRIPTION

Project number

Designed by

Checked by

GT-2040

Document ID

SYSTEM LAY-OUT

A3

1/1

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

Sheet

Approved by

YARD SUPPLY
YARD SUPPLY
KM
AISI 316
KM
AISI 316
KM
AISI 316
KM
AISI 316L
KM
AISI 316
MATERIAL
SUPPLIER
ASD
RHH
MGJ
BEL
ASD
MGJ
HJH
RHH
ASD
HBE
ASD
RHH

M25
13-18

17

Pressure transmitter GT404


mounted on cargo line.

Drawing type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Part No.
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Level and pressure measurem.

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

1 Cable
1 Cable protection tube
6 Lock washer
UTN025/6
6 Screw M6x35
UTN014/6M
1 Protection cover
GT-740
1 Adapter flange
GT-325/1 Pressure transmitter
GT404D_H__T
PART NUMBER
QTY
DESCRIPTION
Remark
10
added.
Partlist
updated.
1212-06-12
2012-04-11 Added material and weight.
2011-11-04 Note 5 corr.
2011-08-18 First release

Project / Product name

REV.

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ITEM
E
D
C
A

Drain hole min. 6


(at lowest point)

Remove sharp edges.

REMARKS:
1. For detailed installation and replacement of pressure transmitter,
see INSTALLATION DRAWING GT-1230.
2. DIMENSIONAL SKETCH, see drawing GT-1314.
3. Remove sharp edges.
4. Pos. 3 (Protection) to be used when installed on deck.
5. O-ring (61.6x2.62) delivered with pressure transmitter.
6. The protection grade of the transmitter is IP66/67.
7. Pos. 4 and 5 are delivered with the pressure transmitter.
8. GT-325 is available for different pipe sizes, see dimensional sketch GT-325.
9. Protection cover GT-740 can be replaced with GT-980, LxWxD=220x60x146.
10. Total weight KM supply: Approx. 3.8 kg

Approx. 90

33

Cover

146

I.G main line pressure measurement

118

98

SW 27

GT402A_C0.6K

Pressure transmitter

17

M20+
10-14

DESCRIPTION

Project number

Designed by

MATERIAL
ASD
ASD
ASD

AISI 316

AISI 316L

AISI 316

AISI 316

GT-2045

Document ID

SYSTEM LAY-OUT

A3

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

1 of 1

Sheet

Approved by

SUPPLIER
RHH
MGJ
HJH
RHH
HBE
RHH

KM

KM

KM

KM

KM

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

Checked by

M25
13-18

AISI 316

Pressure transmitter GT402


mounted on vapour line.

Drawing type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Part No.
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Level and pressure measurem.

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

PART NUMBER
QTY
DESCRIPTION
Remark
5
and
6
added.
Partlist
updated.
2012-06-12
2011-10-31 Dim. 118 added. Qty. pos. 4 changed from 6 to 4.
2011-08-19 First release

GT-769

GT-740

Protection
Adapter flange

UTN014/6H

6531-007.1002

M20
7-12

Screw M6x20

Counter nut ISO228-G1/2

60

Scale 1:4

Cable gland
For cable

Cable protecting tube

Cable

Project / Product name

REV.

ITEM
C
B
A

Drain hole min. 6


(at lowest point)

Remove sharp edges.

REMARK:
1. For detailed installation and replacement of pressure transmitter,
see INSTALLATION DRAWING GT-1227.
2. Remove sharp edges.
3. Pos. 3 (Protection) to be used when installed on deck.
4. The protection grade of the transmitter is IP66/67.
5. Protection cover GT-740 can be replaced with GT-980, LxWxD=220x60x146.
6. Total weight KM supply: Approx. 2.8 kg.

Approx. 70

12

Cover
146

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR GT402 AND GT403

KONGSBERG

IMPORTANT
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS OF GT402

Do NOT install Pressure Transmitter against housing/T-piece filled with cargo/liquid. Remove
the liquid, trying to compress liquid may cause overpressure to the transmitter.

Top cover
Cable gland/connection box

Close valve

Remove liquid to get air in.


Housing/T-piece

1. Close the valve.


2. Dismount the old transmitter. Check that the T-piece/valve not is clogged. Put a finger or
object into the hole where the old transmitter was placed, and remove some liquid in order
to get air in. Use proper safety equipment if cargo is harmful.
3. Mount the new transmitter with a torque of 70-90 Nm. The transmitter must be installed
within 30 degrees from vertical line.
4. Remove the top cover. Remove black protecting plug from the cable gland and install
cable. Make sure that cable/gland fit together. Outer rubber shield on cable must pass the
inlet of the gland. Tighten the gland with a torque of 7-10Nm to ensure a watertight
connection. Connect the power lines with respective + to pos 1 and - to pos 2 + -

Be careful so you dont get liquid or dirt into the connection box during installation.
Replace the top cover immediately and tighten with a torque of 5-7 Nm.
5. Now you can open the valve.

! Warranty will not be valid if installation is done incorrectly!


ATEX Related Document:
All Changes must be approved by ATEX responsible person before taking effect. E-2709/A

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR GT402 AND GT403

KONGSBERG

IMPORTANT
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS OF GT403WITH PUR CABLE

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the red protecting cap.


Put the o-ring into its groove.
Connect the electrical socket to the transmitter (only fits one way).
Make sure that the red and black cables are not squeezed between the transmitter and
flange.
5. Tighten the 4 bolts using a 4mm hexagonal key with a torque of 4Nm.
6. The GT403 N-type with drainage hole is only for submerged installations.
Mounting sequence:

Drainage hole

Beware so the cable is not squeezed between the transmitter and flange

Electrical socket connection


Welding bracket

O-ring into groove


4 hexagonal bolts tighten with 4Nm

! Warranty will not be valid if installation is done incorrectly!


ATEX Related Document:
All Changes must be approved by ATEX responsible person before taking effect. E-2709/A

N2 Gas line pressure measurement


for Residual Tank

CHAPTER 4

Temperature

GC-300 tank temp. for Framo inst.


For Cargo & Slop Tank

79.2

~151

32.5

11

60

90

91

ATEX
Scheduled document.
No modification permitted
without reference to the
Notified Body

89

Project number

Threads: 6g/6H

GC-300-K__

GC-218

Document ID

DIMENSIONAL SKETCH

Drawing type

Approved by

KSI
KSI
HJH

A3

1/1

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

AAS/JSR
JSR
KKS

Connection box for GC-300-K__


w. Kongsberg flange for
temperature sensors

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Part No.
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Designed by

Surface treatment:

DESCRIPTION

STS
STS
STS
Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

DATE

2013-05-07 Text update


2011-08-03 Remark - and title block text changes
2010-06-07 Shrink tubes removed +32.5

Deck interface is according to adapter


and protection pipe.
See drawing MN-4567

REMARKS:
ASSEMBLY DRAWING : GC-217

Weight: 1.3 kg
Protection: IP67
Materials: AISI 316L
Cable: Min. 8 - Max. 15
Input 1 - 3 x PT1000 (PT100)
Output: Hart 1 twisted pair

0: No flexible protection to be installed


1: Flexible protection tube: Adapter GL-2519 added for use with flexible
protection tube GL-1387

M: PT1000
U: PT100
FLEXIBLE PROTECTION TUBE OPTION

Material:

REV.

H
G
E

Ordering key: GC-300-

Optional flexible protection tube adapter

Cable gland ( 8-15 mm)

J: JIS DN65 5K
K: Kongsberg flange type needs adapter UP-1052, UP-1060 or 353167
TEMPERATURE ELEMENT TYPE

FLANGE TYPE

4
3

Trondheim
Project number

Threads: 6g/6H

GC-222

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Drawing type

Approved by

KSI
HJH
HJH
KSI

Revision

1:2

A3

1(3)
Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

AAS
AAS
BMF
HBE

Installation of GC-300 connection box


with temperature sensors
FRAMO pump installation

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Designed by

STS
STS
RKS
STS

Surface treatment:

DESCRIPTION

Heat shrink hose and inst. remark "F" removed.


Heat shrink hose as optional and flex tubes as alternativ
Added Connection diagram as sheet 3
First edition

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

DATE

2011-03-29
2010-06-07
25.11.2009
2009-03-11
Material:

REV.

D
C
B
A

DRAWINGS:
Installation of MN1535 temperature sensors: See sheet 2
Connection diagram: See sheet 3
Preparation of temperature main cable: GC-224

5: If connection box wiring occur later, put back the cover with electronics and
gasket[2] and fasten the tension ring.

4: Fasten GC-300 connection box by using the 4 bolts(UNBRACO)[4] and


washers[3] placed inside the connection box. 6mm hex key(UNBRACO). Torque:
40 Nm.

3: Make sure that the adapter[7] gasket area is clean. Place the gasket [6] on top
of adapter [7]. Then place the GC-300 connection box [5] correctly oriented on top
of the gasket.

2: Unscrew tension ring nut [1] with a 10 mm wrench key, and remove tension
ring. Then remove cover [2] with gasket and electronics and put them on a safe
dry place.

1: FRAMO pump [7] and the temperature sensor protection pipe beneath the
pump flange are made and assembled/welded by pump supplier.

INSTALLATION OF GC-300 CONNECTION BOX:

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

A
Fig. 3

~40

B
Fig. 4

GL-300

Trondheim
Project number

Designed by

STS
STS
RKS
STS

Threads: 6g/6H

GC-222_2

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Approved by

KSI
HJH
HJH
KSI

Revision

1:2

A3

2(3)
Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

AAS
AAS
BMF
HBE

Installation of MN1535-sensor
in GC-300 Connection box
FRAMO pump installation
Drawing type

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DESCRIPTION

Heat shrink hose and ins. remark "F" removed.


Heat shrink hose as optional and flex tubes as alternativ
Added Connection diagram as sheet 3
First edition
AISI 316L

DATE

2010-11-22
2010-06-07
25.11.2009
2009-03-11

Surface treatment:

Material:

REV.

D
C
B
A

Flex tube option: See drawing GL-2626/2

E. Connect wires according to connection diagram on drawing GC-223_3

D. Then lift the tool until it engages the nut [6][Fig. 4] and fasten it. Torque 25
Nm.
Repeat the prosedure on the middle sensor MN1535 and upper MN1535.

C. Push the sensor end of the longest Temperature sensor MN1535 [3] through
the tread hole in the GC-300 connection box bottom[Fig. 1], Enter the mantle
nipple treads[4] by hand[Fig. 2]push the wires through the installation tool [8]
and lower the tool over the nut [6], ring [5], and mantle nipple [4][Fig. 3] and
fasten the nipple.
Torque: 30 Nm.

B. Remove the extra blindplug [7]. They are needed when the number of
Temperature sensors are less then three.

A. Unscrew the tension ring nut and put the ring and connection box cover on a
safe and clean place.
Prepare and install the main temperature cable[1] according to drawing GC-224.
Inspect that the main cable screen is evenly distributed before fastening the
screen clamp[2].

MN1535 installation.

X4

3
1
2
3

X1

X3

X2

Pt100 or PT1000

Trondheim
Project number

Blue

2
1

Blue
Blue

Designed by

Threads: 6g/6H

GC-222_3

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Drawing type

Connection wiring diagram


for GC-300
FRAMO pump installation

Surface: Ra 3,2
Title

Approved by

HJH
HJH

Revision

A3

3(3)
Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

AAS
BMF

Yellow

STS
RKS
STS

Yellow

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Welded Steel Mild

DATE

Black

Yellow

4-wire connection

2010-06-07 Heat shrink tube as optional and flex tubes as alternativ


25.11.2009 Added Connection diagram as sheet 3
2009-03-20 First edition

Surface treatment:

Material:

REV.

C
B
A

Yellow

3-wire connection

Pt100 or PT1000

PT1000

Yellow

2-wire connection

Pt1000 /0C or PT100 /0C

ELEMENT TYPE

~200

~30

Screen

n15

Gland: M20x1.5
Cable range- Min.
8 -max. 15

3. If cable outside diameter is larger than 10.5 mm, remove


the inner ring of the gland gasket with a screwdriver. Insert
the cable until the outer mantle is aligned with the inner edge
of the gland and remove the tape.

n10.5

Cable mantle end


Gland gasket inner ring
Gland gasket outer ring
Gland nut

2. Tape the cable screen before inserting the cable

Tape

1. Strip the cable. Dimension range: 8- 15

Screen clamp

DESCRIPTION

STS

Trondheim
Project number

GC-224

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Drawing type

KSI
Approved by

A4

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

HBE

B(2:1)

Cable preparation GC-300

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Automation Offshore & Marine Division

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Threads: 6g/6H

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Designed by

Surface treatment:

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

2009-03-13 First edition

Material:

REV.

Fig.1

4. Tighten the gland nut until the gasket is sorrounding


cable tight and oozing between the cable mantle and
nut[Fig. 1]. ~Torque 5 Nm. Fold the cable screens back
distributed evenly over the gland inner surface, and
fasten the screen clamp.

1.5

90.0

n85.0
n60 `0.3

+ 0.5

n30 0.0

+ 0.3

n13 0.0

3
2
1
ITEM
B
A

1 Gasket type UY-148/3


1 Gasket type UY-148/2
1 Gasket type UY-148/1
QTY
DESCRIPTION

UY-148/3
UY-148/2
UY-148/1
PART NUMBER
Parts List

novaflon 300
GORETEX 0-0DIN28091
Nitril
MATERIAL

05.11.2010 Added novaflon 300 option


2008-12-10 First edition

REV.

DATE

Material:

AAS
STS
Designed by

DESCRIPTION

* See partslist above

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Surface treatment:

Surface: Ra 3,2

Merchant Automation Offshore & Marine Division

GL-300

Approved by

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Gasket type UY-148


for temperature sensor unit GC-300

Sheet

1(1)
Size

A4
Scale

Trondheim
Project / Product name

Checked by

KSI
HBE

Threads: 6g/6H

Title

Kongsberg Maritime AS

HJH
STP

1:1
Project number

Drawing type

DETAIL DRAWING

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

UY-148

GC-300 tank temp. for Deck inst.


For Residual Tank

~200

~30

Screen

n15

Gland: M20x1.5
Cable range- Min.
8 -max. 15

3. If cable outside diameter is larger than 10.5 mm, remove


the inner ring of the gland gasket with a screwdriver. Insert
the cable until the outer mantle is aligned with the inner edge
of the gland and remove the tape.

n10.5

Cable mantle end


Gland gasket inner ring
Gland gasket outer ring
Gland nut

2. Tape the cable screen before inserting the cable

Tape

1. Strip the cable. Dimension range: 8- 15

Screen clamp

DESCRIPTION

STS

Trondheim
Project number

GC-224

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Drawing type

KSI
Approved by

A4

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

HBE

B(2:1)

Cable preparation GC-300

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Automation Offshore & Marine Division

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Threads: 6g/6H

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Designed by

Surface treatment:

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

2009-03-13 First edition

Material:

REV.

Fig.1

4. Tighten the gland nut until the gasket is sorrounding


cable tight and oozing between the cable mantle and
nut[Fig. 1]. ~Torque 5 Nm. Fold the cable screens back
distributed evenly over the gland inner surface, and
fasten the screen clamp.

3.1 3.2

Project number / Item ID

Merchant Marine Division


Trondheim

AAS
AAS
Checked by

STS
STS
STS
Designed by

GC-223

Installation drawing

Drawing type

temperature sensors.

connection box with

Installation of GC-300-K_type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime

GL-300

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

2013-10-17 Loctite 542 added and text corrections


2011-09-01 Title field and text update
2009-03-11 First edition

Project / Product name

REV.

F
E
A

DRAWINGS:
Adapter and protection pipe: MN-4511
Installation of temperature sensors: See drawing GC-223_2
Preparation of temperature main cable: GC-224
Connection diagram: GC-223_3

A3

1 of 3

Revision

Scale

Size

Sheet

Approved by

KSI
KSI

6. When all wiring is completed and this is the last step in installation, take silica gel [7]
out of plastic bag and place the silica gel inside the connection box.

5: If connection box wiring occur later, put back the cover [2] with electronics and
gasket, silica gel plastic bag [7] and fasten the tension ring.

4: Fasten GC-300 connection box by using the 4 unbraco bolts [3.1] and washers [3.2]
placed inside the connection box. 6 mm unbraco key. Torque: 40 Nm.

3: Make sure that the adapter [6] gasket area is clean. Place the gasket [5] on top
of adapter [6]. Then place the GC-300-K__ connection box [4] correctly oriented
on top of the gasket.

2: Unscrew tension ring nut [1] with a 10 mm wrench, and remove tension ring.
Then remove cover [2] with gasket and electronics and put them on a safe place.

Option: No transfer heat liquid when fast temperature respons time is not relevant.

1: Inspect that the adapter [6] and the sensor protection pipe beneath are made,
assembled/welded and leakage tested according to drawing MN-4511.
NB! Prior to installation: Inspect and make sure that the protection pipe contain no
water. Heat transfer liquid is only needed when fast temperature response time is
required.
Heat transfer liquid specification: The transfer liquid must;
* Suit the cargo temperature.
-Not to freeze or crystallize in the temperature range.
-Not to boil in the temperature range
* Not corrode the sensors and pipe
* Not be harmful to the cargo

INSTALLATION OF GC-300 CONNECTION BOX:

Fig. 1

15

13.2

13.1

Fig. 2

12

11

10

38

14

Fig. 3

~40

Fig. 4

Project number / Item ID

Merchant Marine Division


Trondheim

AAS
AAS
Checked by

STS
STS
STS
Designed by

GC-223

Installation drawing

Drawing type

temperature sensors.

connection box with

Installation of GC-300-K_type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime

GL-300

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

2013-10-17 Loctite 542 added and text corrections


2011-09-01 Title field and text update
2009-03-11 First edition

Project / Product name

REV.

F
E
A

Flex tube options: See drawing 369738, 384083 and 384010.

A3

2 of 3

Revision

Scale

Size

Sheet

Approved by

KSI
KSI

F. When all wiring is completed and this is the last step in installation, take silica gel [7]
out of plastic bag and place the silica gel inside the connection box.

E. Connect wires according to connection diagram on drawing GC-223_3

C. Then lift the tool until it engages the nut [11] [Fig. 4] and fasten it. Torque 25 Nm.
Repeat the procedure on the middle temperature sensor and upper temperature
sensor.
If less than 3 temperature sensors, install blindplug(s) [14] in the free thread hole(s).
Apply Loctite 542 [13.2] on the blindplug(s) threads. Fasten the blindplug(s).
Torque: 30 Nm.

B. Push the sensor end of the longest Temperature sensor [10] through the tread hole
in the GC-300 connection box bottom [Fig. 1]. Apply Loctite 542 [13.2] on mantle
nipple threads before entering the mantle nipple [13.1] by hand [Fig. 2] push the
wires through the installation tool [9] and lower the tool over the nut [11], ring [12],
and mantle nipple [13.1] [Fig. 3] and fasten the nipple.
Torque: 30 Nm.

A. Unscrew the tension ring nut and put the ring and connection box cover on a safe
and clean place. Prepare and install the main temperature cable[13] according to
drawing GC-224. Inspect that the main cable screen is evenly distributed before
fastening the screen clamp [8].

Temperature sensor installation.

Blue

Blue

Yellow

Yellow

4-wire connection

X4

Yellow

HART +
HART -

1 2

Yellow

X1 = Top
X2 = Middle
X3 = Bottom

X2

1 2 3 4

X1

2-wire connection

X3

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4
Project number / Item ID

Merchant Marine Division


Trondheim

Blue

Checked by

1
Blue

Designed by

2
Blue

AAS
AAS

Yellow

STS
STS
STS

Yellow

GC-223

Installation drawing

Drawing type

temperature sensors.

connection box with

Installation of GC-300-K_type

Title

Black

Yellow

4-wire connection

Pt100 or PT1000

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime

GL-300

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

2013-10-17 Loctite 542 added and text corrections


2011-09-01 Title field and text update
2009-03-11 First edition

Project / Product name

REV.

F
E
A

Yellow

3-wire connection

Pt100 or PT1000

PT1000

Yellow

2-wire connection

Pt1000 /0C or PT100 /0C

ELEMENT TYPE

A3

3 of 3

Revision

Scale

Size

Sheet

Approved by

KSI
KSI

79.2

~151

32.5

11

60

90

91

ATEX
Scheduled document.
No modification permitted
without reference to the
Notified Body

89

Project number

Threads: 6g/6H

GC-300-K__

GC-218

Document ID

DIMENSIONAL SKETCH

Drawing type

Approved by

KSI
KSI
HJH

A3

1/1

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

AAS/JSR
JSR
KKS

Connection box for GC-300-K__


w. Kongsberg flange for
temperature sensors

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Part No.
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Designed by

Surface treatment:

DESCRIPTION

STS
STS
STS
Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

DATE

2013-05-07 Text update


2011-08-03 Remark - and title block text changes
2010-06-07 Shrink tubes removed +32.5

Deck interface is according to adapter


and protection pipe.
See drawing MN-4567

REMARKS:
ASSEMBLY DRAWING : GC-217

Weight: 1.3 kg
Protection: IP67
Materials: AISI 316L
Cable: Min. 8 - Max. 15
Input 1 - 3 x PT1000 (PT100)
Output: Hart 1 twisted pair

0: No flexible protection to be installed


1: Flexible protection tube: Adapter GL-2519 added for use with flexible
protection tube GL-1387

M: PT1000
U: PT100
FLEXIBLE PROTECTION TUBE OPTION

Material:

REV.

H
G
E

Ordering key: GC-300-

Optional flexible protection tube adapter

Cable gland ( 8-15 mm)

J: JIS DN65 5K
K: Kongsberg flange type needs adapter UP-1052, UP-1060 or 353167
TEMPERATURE ELEMENT TYPE

FLANGE TYPE

1.5

90.0

n85.0
n60 `0.3

+ 0.5

n30 0.0

+ 0.3

n13 0.0

3
2
1
ITEM
B
A

1 Gasket type UY-148/3


1 Gasket type UY-148/2
1 Gasket type UY-148/1
QTY
DESCRIPTION

UY-148/3
UY-148/2
UY-148/1
PART NUMBER
Parts List

novaflon 300
GORETEX 0-0DIN28091
Nitril
MATERIAL

05.11.2010 Added novaflon 300 option


2008-12-10 First edition

REV.

DATE

Material:

AAS
STS
Designed by

DESCRIPTION

* See partslist above

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Surface treatment:

Surface: Ra 3,2

Merchant Automation Offshore & Marine Division

GL-300

Approved by

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Gasket type UY-148


for temperature sensor unit GC-300

Sheet

1(1)
Size

A4
Scale

Trondheim
Project / Product name

Checked by

KSI
HBE

Threads: 6g/6H

Title

Kongsberg Maritime AS

HJH
STP

1:1
Project number

Drawing type

DETAIL DRAWING

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

UY-148

NOTE 1

C
C

C-C ( 1 : 1 )

E - E(1 : 1 )

Liquid proof sensor protection


pipe (may be filled with e.g.
transformer oil or other
suitable liquid).

Cut this pipe end to


obtain necessary
length L of the
protection pipe.

B-B ( 1 : 1 )

Project / Product name

Trondheim
Project number

Merchant Marine Division

Designed by

Threads: 6g/6H

MN-4567

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Approved by

Revision

A3

1(2)
Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

See MN-4567_2
AISI 316L
AISI 316L
AISI 316L
AISI 316L
MATERIAL
STS
KSI
AAS
KSI
HJH
AAS

Adapter and protection pipe for


temperature sensor type MN-1535
GC-300
Drawing type

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Welded Steel Mild

DATE

Surface treatment:

Material:

REV.

5
Pipe suspension unit type MN-4567/2
4
Muff
3
Sensor pipe coin 27 x3
2
Sensor pipe "OD"33.4x"T"3.38 "L"6000
1
1 Adapter for GC-300
353167
ITEM QTY
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Distance
between
suspensions
changed
(NOTE
1)
21.12.2010
C
AAS
Adapter
353167
in
and
UP-1052
out-Adapter
up-1074
out
B
2010-11-16
STS
A 2010-06-09 First edition
STS

REMARKS:
Make certain that the protection pipe is air tight. Checking the pipe for leaks may be done when pressure
testing the tank. When the tank is pressurized, loosen one of the temperature sensors and use soap water
to check if there is pressure in the pipe.

NOTE 1: Distance between pipe suspensions must be according to ship or classification society specification

A-A ( 1 : 2 )

95 `2

70.0

Trondheim
Project number

YARD SUPPLY

MN-4567_2

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Drawing type
The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Threads: 6g/6H

Approved by

Revision

1:1

A3

2(2)
Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

AISI 316
AISI 316
AISI 316
AISI 316L
AISI 316
MATERIAL
HJH
AAS

Pipe suspension unit type MN-4567_2

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Kongsberg Maritime AS

STS
Designed by

Surface treatment:

DESCRIPTION

Yard supply
Yard supply
Yard supply
Yard supply
Yard supply
VENDOR

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

DATE

Material:

REV.

5
2 M8 Nut
4
2 8mm Spring Lock Washers.
3
2 M8 x 20 Hex Screw
2
1 Pipe suspension
1
1 Suspension clamp
ITEM QTY
DESCRIPTION
A 2010-06-09 First sdition

n34

+ 0.3
22 - 0.0
+ 0.0
20 - 0.5

100 1

14

60 0.3

R2

90.0

0.5 X 45.0 Chamfer

R2

R2

R2

43 0.5

35.4 +- 0.5
0.0

A-A
4

26 0.0

+ 0.5

92 1

4x M10x1.5 - 6H

18.0

0.5 X 45.0 Chamfer

30.7 +- 1
0

R8.0

10.2

18

1.0 X 45.0 Chamfer

1,6

125

DESCRIPTION

Trondheim
Project number

Designed by

STS
STS

Threads: 6g/6H

353163

Document ID

Approved by

KSI
KSI

A3

Revision

1:1

Scale

Size

1 of 1

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

AAS
AAS

DETAIL DRAWING

Adapter for GC-300


JIS25A pipe

353167

Drawing type

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Part No.
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

AISI 316L
Passivation (18-25% HNO3)

DATE

2011-04-06 Hole depth


2010-09-28 First release

Surface treatment:

Material:

REV.

B
A

Inspect that there is no pittholes and cavities.

Weight: 1kg.

REMARKS.

For installation with flex. Prot. Tubes

Wrench size 24 mm

1
2

M20x1.5

G 3/4-14

Wrench size 32 mm
Wrench size 35 mm

D-D ( 1 : 2 )

Trondheim
Project number

Threads: 6g/6H

ASSEMBLY DRAWING

GL-2626

HJH
Approved by

A3

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

2 of 2

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

AAS

Welded AISI 316L


MATERIAL

AISI 316

Installation utilizing Protection Hose


on Radar Tank Gauge with M20 Nipple
for cable 8-15 mm
(GL-2626/2)
Drawing type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

STP
Designed by

Surface: Ra 3,2

DESCRIPTION

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

First release

PART NUMBER

Surface treatment:

DATE

Parts List

GL-1387
GL-2519
329245

Material:

08.06.2010

Protection Hose
Protection hose adapter GL-1387
Gland M20x1.5 Cable 8-15
GLA-300 Housing Nipple M20
DESCRIPTION
A

1
1
1
1
QTY

REV.

4
3
2
1
ITEM

Protection hose venting holes downwards after mounting

C-C ( 1 : 2 )

M30x1.5

59

1x45

24.0 +- 0.0
0.3

A-A

1x45

32 +- 0.0
0.3

1x45

G 3/4-14 - A

17

28.5

22

C(5:1)

2
1x45

30

Project / Product name

GL-2519

Project number / Item ID

GL-2519

Detail Drawing

Drawing type

for Radar Tank Gauge

Inside M30 to outside G 3/4"

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime

GL300

Sheet

A3

1 of 1

Revision

1,5 : 1

Scale

Threads: 6g/6H

Mechant Marine Division


Trondheim

Adapter type GL-2519

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Approved by

KSI
HBE
Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

Designed by
Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Size

DESCRIPTION

ASD
STP

BEL
STS

D(4:1)

VIEW2 ( 1 : 1 )

Kongsberg Maritime AS

AISI 316

DATE

2012-10-23 Extended length of threads, new frame and title field.


2008-11-19 Released

Surface treatment:

Material:

REV.

B
A

Remarks:
Remove all burrs.

M30x1.5

B-B

13

24

35

12

10
2

CHAPTER 5

Distributed Processing Units

CHAPTER 6

Cabinets

138

138

254

375

463

50

BOTTOM VIEW

621

Over cover (t=2 mm)


3(636x86x2/4-M5)

Bed support (t=4 mm)


795x370/6- 16

715

FRONT VIEW

TOP/FREE SPACE REQUIREMENT

SIDE VIEW
Max. 45

TOP

TOP

X
MA

805

.0
90

1863

FREE SPACE IN FRONT


OF CABINET

843

800

400
418

MECHANICAL DATA:
Protection code: IP22
Material:
Steel t2.2
Weight: Aprox. 170 kg

2011-10-18

REV.

DATE

INITIAL
DESCRIPTION

TAM

AAS

KSI

Designed by

Checked by

Approved by

Yard/Hull No:
Title

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Merchant Marine Division
Trondheim
Project / Product name

K-GAUGE GL-300

Project number

Item no. 334364

Sheet

GLN-300/24 CARGO LEVEL SYSTEM

1 /1
Size

CABINET FOR MAX 24 GLK's

A4
Scale

w/TOUCH SCREEN COMPUTER

1:20

Drawing type

DIMENTIONAL SKETCH

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime

Revision

364414

MOUNTINGPLATE WITH MAX NUMBER OF COMPONENTS

UNMANAGED SWITCH

24 VDC POWER SUPPLY

U2

U1

X4
GLK-300 1-8
CAN ETHERNET GATEWAY

FAN HOUSING (FAN 1-2)

FX10

X1

F40,F30

X4
GLK-300 9-16
FAN HOUSING (FAN 3-4)
X2
X4

GLK-300 17-24

X3
CABLE DUCT 60x80

X4

CABLE DUCT 60x80

FAN HOUSING (FAN 5-6)


DPUs

DZ-110

I.S BAR
SAFE CABLES

EX CABLES
B

2011-10-25

REV.

DATE

MOVED SOCKET OUTLET AND RENAMED POWER SUPPLY


DESCRIPTION

TAM

AAS

KSI

Designed by

Checked by

Approved by

Yard/Hull No:
Title

Sheet

Kongsberg Maritime AS

GLN-300/24 CARGO LEVEL SYSTEM

Merchant Marine Division


Trondheim

MOUNTINGPLATE INSIDE CABINET

Project / Product name

K-GAUGE GL-300

Project number

Item no. 334364

1 /1
Size

A4
Scale

FOR MAX 24 GLK's

1:10

Drawing type

LAYOUT

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime

Revision

364416

13.3" IPC Touch screen Computer

BOTTOM VIEW

Cables max. 2.5 mm


Terminal label
M5 fastening screw

REAR VIEW

215

SIDE VIEW
Gasket

256

FRONT VIEW

7
396

364

65

IO LABEL
TERMINAL LABEL (SCALE 1:1.7)

IO LABEL (SCALE 1:1.7)

CUTOUT
5.5

POWER SUPPLY: DUAL 24 VDC


MAXIMUM POWER CONSUMPTION: 50W
WEIGHT: 5 kg
IP RATING: FRONT IP66, BACK IP20
COLOUR: BLACK, RAL 9000

239
215

4x

.3
R1
335
364
E

2012-03-13

REV.

DATE

CO14538
DESCRIPTION

TAM

ES

KHL

Designed by

Checked by

Approved by

Yard/Hull No:
Title

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Merchant Marine Division
Horten

Sheet

13" IPC
Touch screen computer

1 /1
Size

A4
Scale

1:7
Project / Product name

Project number

Item no. 349998

Drawing type

Outline

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID
contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design.
Kongsberg Maritime

Revision

350012

Serial Interface

MODBUS Protocol
K-Gauge GL-300 Cargo Level System

Yard / Hull: HMD H2511-2522


HMD H2541-2552
KM ref no: i033802
Project mgr: HCK
Project eng: GSS

16-bit integer
Addr.
Reg. type
000
3
001
3
002
3
003
3
004
3
005
3
006
3
007
3
008
3
009
3
010
3
011
3
012
3
013
3
014
3
015
3

Data
Cargo Tank 1P
Cargo Tank 1S
Cargo Tank 2P
Cargo Tank 2S
Cargo Tank 3P
Cargo Tank 3S
Cargo Tank 4P
Cargo Tank 4S
Cargo Tank 5P
Cargo Tank 5S
Cargo Tank 6P
Cargo Tank 6S
Cargo Tank 7P
Cargo Tank 7S
Slop Tank P
Slop Tank S

Description
Ullage
Ullage
Ullage
Ullage
Ullage
Ullage
Ullage
Ullage
Ullage
Ullage
Ullage
Ullage
Ullage
Ullage
Ullage
Ullage

Unit
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m

Dec
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Cargo Tank 1P
Cargo Tank 1S
Cargo Tank 2P
Cargo Tank 2S
Cargo Tank 3P
Cargo Tank 3S
Cargo Tank 4P
Cargo Tank 4S
Cargo Tank 5P
Cargo Tank 5S
Cargo Tank 6P
Cargo Tank 6S
Cargo Tank 7P
Cargo Tank 7S
Slop Tank P
Slop Tank S

Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level

m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Cargo Tank 1P
Cargo Tank 1S
Cargo Tank 2P
Cargo Tank 2S
Cargo Tank 3P
Cargo Tank 3S
Cargo Tank 4P
Cargo Tank 4S
Cargo Tank 5P
Cargo Tank 5S
Cargo Tank 6P
Cargo Tank 6S
Cargo Tank 7P
Cargo Tank 7S
Slop Tank P

Bottom Temp
Bottom Temp
Bottom Temp
Bottom Temp
Bottom Temp
Bottom Temp
Bottom Temp
Bottom Temp
Bottom Temp
Bottom Temp
Bottom Temp
Bottom Temp
Bottom Temp
Bottom Temp
Bottom Temp

degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

615
616

3
3

Slop Tank S
Residual Tank

Bottom Temp
Bottom Temp

degr.C
degr.C

1
1

800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Cargo Tank 1P
Cargo Tank 1S
Cargo Tank 2P
Cargo Tank 2S
Cargo Tank 3P
Cargo Tank 3S
Cargo Tank 4P
Cargo Tank 4S
Cargo Tank 5P
Cargo Tank 5S
Cargo Tank 6P
Cargo Tank 6S
Cargo Tank 7P
Cargo Tank 7S
Slop Tank P
Slop Tank S

Middle Temp
Middle Temp
Middle Temp
Middle Temp
Middle Temp
Middle Temp
Middle Temp
Middle Temp
Middle Temp
Middle Temp
Middle Temp
Middle Temp
Middle Temp
Middle Temp
Middle Temp
Middle Temp

degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Cargo Tank 1P
Cargo Tank 1S
Cargo Tank 2P
Cargo Tank 2S
Cargo Tank 3P
Cargo Tank 3S
Cargo Tank 4P
Cargo Tank 4S
Cargo Tank 5P
Cargo Tank 5S
Cargo Tank 6P
Cargo Tank 6S
Cargo Tank 7P
Cargo Tank 7S
Slop Tank P
Slop Tank S
Residual Tank

Avg. Liq. Temp


Avg. Liq. Temp
Avg. Liq. Temp
Avg. Liq. Temp
Avg. Liq. Temp
Avg. Liq. Temp
Avg. Liq. Temp
Avg. Liq. Temp
Avg. Liq. Temp
Avg. Liq. Temp
Avg. Liq. Temp
Avg. Liq. Temp
Avg. Liq. Temp
Avg. Liq. Temp
Avg. Liq. Temp
Avg. Liq. Temp
Avg. Liq. Temp

degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C
degr.C

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Cargo Tank 1P
Cargo Tank 1S
Cargo Tank 2P
Cargo Tank 2S
Cargo Tank 3P
Cargo Tank 3S
Cargo Tank 4P
Cargo Tank 4S
Cargo Tank 5P
Cargo Tank 5S
Cargo Tank 6P
Cargo Tank 6S
Cargo Tank 7P
Cargo Tank 7S
Slop Tank P
Slop Tank S

I.G Press
I.G Press
I.G Press
I.G Press
I.G Press
I.G Press
I.G Press
I.G Press
I.G Press
I.G Press
I.G Press
I.G Press
I.G Press
I.G Press
I.G Press
I.G Press

mBar
mBar
mBar
mBar
mBar
mBar
mBar
mBar
mBar
mBar
mBar
mBar
mBar
mBar
mBar
mBar

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1500
1501
1502

3
3
3

Cargo Tank 1P
Cargo Tank 1S
Cargo Tank 2P

Mani. Line. Press


Mani. Line. Press
Mani. Line. Press

Bar
Bar
Bar

2
2
2

1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Cargo Tank 2S
Cargo Tank 3P
Cargo Tank 3S
Cargo Tank 4P
Cargo Tank 4S
Cargo Tank 5P
Cargo Tank 5S
Cargo Tank 6P
Cargo Tank 6S
Cargo Tank 7P
Cargo Tank 7S
Slop Tank P
Slop Tank S

Mani. Line. Press


Mani. Line. Press
Mani. Line. Press
Mani. Line. Press
Mani. Line. Press
Mani. Line. Press
Mani. Line. Press
Mani. Line. Press
Mani. Line. Press
Mani. Line. Press
Mani. Line. Press
Mani. Line. Press
Mani. Line. Press

Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2600
2601
2602
2603

3
3
3
3

N2 Gas Main
Residual Tank
Ballast pump P
Ballast pump S

Line Press
Line Press
Line Press
Line Press

Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar

2
2
2
2

2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Atmospheric pressure
Trim
List
Draft fore at mark
Draft aft at mark
Draft port at mark
Draft starboard at mark
Seawater density

ATM
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Draft
Density

mBar
m
degr.
m
m
m
m
t/m3

0
3
2
3
3
3
3
3

CHAPTER 7

Uninterrupted Power Supplies - UPS

CHAPTER 8

Manuals

Installation guide

Installation Guide
GL-300
Installation guide for mounting the GLA-300 and GC-300
GL-300
GL-300
GL-300

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

GL-300

Revisions

Rev.
A
B
C
D

Written by
Date
2010-02-15
2010-04-07
2010-09-06
2010-12-15

Checked by
Date
2010-02-15
2010-04-07
2010-09-06
2010-12-15

Sign.
BMF
BMF
BMF
BMF

Sign.
JIP/ZQP
AAS
RKS
AAS

Approved by
Date
2010-02-19
2010-04-07
2010-09-06
2010-12-15

Sign.
HJH
HJH
HJH
KSI

Document history

Rev. A
Rev. B
Rev. C
Rev. D

First edition
Added Japanese translation, and new picture concerning earth grounding.
Added list of tools, and corrected connection drawing on page 9.
Removed shrink hose from GLA-300 and GC-300.

The following tools are required:

Torque wrench

2 x 30 mm spanner

1 screwdriver flat small (3mm)

1 screwdriver flat medium (8mm)

1 big adjustable spanner for the flexible hose.

1 13 mm spanner

1 pc. rug for cleaning gasket surfaces and gaskets

1 wire cutter

1 wire stripper.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice. Kongsberg
Maritime AS shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential
damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this document.
2010 Kongsberg Maritime AS. All rights reserved. No part of this work covered by the
copyright hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied without prior permission from
Kongsberg Maritime AS.

Kongsberg Maritime AS
NO-7005 Trondheim
Norway

Telephone: +47 73 58 10 00
Telefax:
+47 73 58 10 01
www.kongsberg.com
E-mail: km.sales@kongsberg.com

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

GLA-300 Radar Tank Gauge installation

Socket flange cleaning

Gasket preparation

Antenna direction relative to inspection hatch.


Standard orientation.

.
.

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

GL-300

Antenna direction relative to inspection hatch.


Alternative orientation.

.
.

Place the GLA-300 antenna unit carefully on


the socket and make sure that the gasket stays
in correct position.
GLA-300

GLA-300
,
.

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

For earth grounding, two of the bolts must


have lockers on both side of type toothed
washer

2
, (
) .
x2

Tighten bolts in numbered order, first loosely.

Tighten bolts in numbered order. Torque 100


Nm.

100Nm

.(:100Nm)

100Nm
P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

GL-300

Remove the protection cap prior to cable


insertion

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

Alternative installation with flexible protection hose

Adapter for flexible hose

Fasten the cable gland, and finalize with fasten


the flex hose adapter.

,
.

Fasten the flexible hose and make sure the


drain hole is positioned downwards

,
.

Alternative with flexible hose on cable

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

GL-300
Visual inspection

Tighten the cable gland nut so the rubber


sealing inside is compressed around the cable.
This is very important to ensure a water tight
connection through the gland.


.

.

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

Ship cable outer mantle must go through the


cable gland.

Fold the cable screen back distributed evenly


over the gland inner surface, and fasten the
screen clamp.



.
.

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

10

GL-300

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Radar and temperature connection drawing

Installation guide

Use a wire stripper and remove 10 mm of the


insulation
10
()
10mm .

10

Make sure the copper cores are neatly twisted

Insert the wires into the plug, and push it as far


down as possible. Then release the locking
mechanisme.


. .

All 6 cables connected.


6
6 .
6

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

11

GL-300
Any spare cables must be sealed

Open Silica gel zip-bag, remove plastic bag


and put Silica gel inside house.

,
.

Strap the ship cables to the brackets on the


adapter.

12

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

Check that gasket and sealing surface are free


of wire cuts and burrs before closing radar.

When wiring and connections are completed,


mount cover.

Assemble the clamp


.

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

13

GL-300

Clamp assembly: First fit loosely on both sides.


Adjust so distance A is equal on both sides
after tightening. Torque 20 to 30 Nm.

A,
20 30 Nm.
.
A
. 20 30Nm

A
20~30Nm

14

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

GC-300 Tank temperature installation

Flange cleaning.

Gasket preparation.

Place the GC-300 unit carefully on the socket


and make sure that the gasket stays in correct
position.
GC-300

GC-300 ,
.
GC-300

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

15

GL-300

Tighten bolts, first loosely. Torque 40 Nm.

40Nm
,
. 40Nm

40Nm

Insert the temperature sensors. Start with the


longest and finish with the shortest sensor.

.
.

Lower the installation tool over the nut, ring


and mantle nipple

,
.

16

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

Fasten the lowermost nipple, torque 30 Nm

30Nm.
. 30Nm
30Nm

Lift the tool and fasten the uppermost nut,


torque 25 Nm.

25Nm.
.
25Nm

25Nm

Prepare the GC-300 cover


GC-300
GC-300 .
GC-300

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

17

GL-300

Fold the cable screen back distributed evenly


over the gland inner surface, and fasten the
screen clamp.



.
.

Connect the cables according to connection


drawing. GC 223-3
And put silica gel bag in GC-300 house
GC223-3
GC-300
(GC 223-3) .
GC-300
.
GC223-3
GC-300

18

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

Connection drawing GC 223-3

X1 :Top sensor
X2: Middle sensor
X3: Bottom sensor
Mount the flex hose adapter, but dont fasten it.

. ,
.

Fasten the cable gland, and finalize with fasten


the flex hose adapter.

,
.

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

19

GL-300
Fasten the flexible hose and make sure the
drain hole is positioned downwards

,
.

Put on the clamp

Fasten the tension ring. Torque 20 to 30 Nm

. 20 30NM
2030Nm
GC-300 complete installed with protection
hose
GC-300
GC300 .
GC-300

20

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

User manual

User Manual
GL-300 Tank Monitoring

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

Revisions

Rev.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G

Written by
Date
2009-04-15
2009-06-29
2009-10-27
2010-03-09
2010-04-09
2010-04-12
2011-05-12

Sign.
KSI
KSI
KSI
BMF
OIT
OIT
BMF

Checked by
Date
2009-04-16
2009-06-29
2009-11-12
2010-03-10
2010-04-09
2010-04-12
2011-05-13

Sign.
BMF
BMF
BMF
KSI
BMF
BMF
KSI

Approved by
Date
2009-04-17
2009-06-29
2009-11-12
2010-03-10
2010-04-09
2010-04-12
2011-05.13

Sign.
BHJ
BHJ
BHJ
BHJ
BHJ
HJH
AAS

Document history

Rev. A
Rev. B
Rev. C
Rev. D
Rev. E
Rev. F
Rev. G

First edition
Updated figures
Updated figures and minor text changes
Troubleshooting chapter expanded with fault descriptions
Added instructions for changing broken GLK-300 by use of the Upgrade Handler
program
Corrections in chapter 2.2
Maintenance chapter updated.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice.
Kongsberg Maritime AS shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental
or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this
document.
2010 Kongsberg Maritime AS. All rights reserved. No part of this work covered by
the copyright hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied without prior permission
from Kongsberg Maritime AS.

Kongsberg Maritime AS
NO-7005 Trondheim
Norway

ATEX Related document


Phone:
+47 73 58 10 00
Fax:
+47 73 58 10 01
www.kongsberg.com
E-mail: km.support@kongsberg.com

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

Table of contents
ABBREVIATIONS.......................................................................................................... 5
1 GENERAL INFORMATION ................................................................................. 6
1.1
The Radar Tank Gauge ........................................................................................... 6
1.1.1

Special condition for safe use. .................................................................... 7

1.1.2
GLA-300 marking ...................................................................................... 7
1.2
The Cargo Temperature Unit.................................................................................. 8
1.3
The Signal Processing Unit .................................................................................... 8
1.1
Topology................................................................................................................. 9
2 MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................... 10
2.1
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 10
2.2
Overview .............................................................................................................. 10
2.3
Service and maintenance of the RTG ................................................................... 10
2.4
Preventive maintenance ........................................................................................ 11
2.4.1

General...................................................................................................... 11

2.4.2

Weekly maintenance................................................................................. 12

2.4.3

3-monthly maintenance ............................................................................ 12

2.4.4
Yearly maintenance .................................................................................. 12
2.5
Deck installation ................................................................................................... 12
2.6
How to replace a broken SPU............................................................................... 14
2.6.1

Upgrade Handler software ........................................................................ 14

2.6.2

Upgrade Handler interface........................................................................ 15

2.6.3

Operational procedures ............................................................................. 16

3 TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................................ 22
3.1
Power up the GLKs after fault situation.............................................................. 24
3.2
Fault and fault presentation .................................................................................. 24
3.2.1

GLK-300 power failure ............................................................................ 24

3.2.2

Ethernet 1 broken...................................................................................... 25

3.2.3

Ethernet 2 broken...................................................................................... 26

3.2.4

Hart line between GLK and GLB broken ................................................ 27

3.2.5

GLB power failure .................................................................................... 28

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

3.2.6

RS-485 between GLK and GLB broken .................................................. 30

3.2.7

Temperature sensor failure ....................................................................... 32

3.2.8

GC-300 communication to GLK-300 broken ........................................... 33

3.2.9

Inert pressure failure ................................................................................. 35

FAQ ......................................................................................................................... 37

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

ABBREVIATIONS
CTU:

Cargo Temperature Unit

EPDM:

Ethylene Propylene Diene M-class

ETH:

Ethernet

FEP:

Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene

GC-300:

Cargo Temperature Unit (CTU).

GLA-300: Radar Tank Gauge (RTG).


GLK-300: Signal Processing Unit (SPU).

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

GS:

Gauge Socket.

IAS:

Integrated Alarm System

LED:

Light Emitting Diode

PTFE:

PolyTetraFluorEthylene.

ROS:

Remote Operator Station

RTG:

Radar Tank Gauge.

SPU:

Signal Processing Unit.

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

1 GENERAL INFORMATION
GL-300 Tank Monitoring uses well established radar principles
to provide accurate level measurements. An inert gas pressure
transmitter is integrated in the Radar Tank Gauge, which also
acts as a connection box for the Cargo Temperature Unit. The
CTU shares the communication cable with the RTG. Advanced
signal processing ensures accuracy and reliability.
GL-300 Tank Monitoring mainly consists of:
The GLA-300 Radar Tank Gauge (RTG).
The GC-300 Cargo Temperature Unit (CTU).
The GLK-300 Signal Processing Unit (SPU).
Each tank is equipped with one RTG and one CTU in hazardous
area connected to the SPU in safe area. GL-300 Tank
Monitoring consists of up to 60 SPUs.

1.1 The Radar Tank Gauge


The RTG is fitted to a Gauge Socket, mounted on top of the tank, leaving no parts of the
system in physical contact with the tank content. The rugged construction of the RTG
enables withstanding of severe mechanical, physical and chemical environmental
conditions. Only AISI 316 acid-resistant steel and Teflon (PTFE) are used.

Figure 1 GLA-300 Radar Tank Gauge

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

1.1.1 Special condition for safe use.


From the GLA-300 ATEX certificate note the following:

The GL-2513 is included in the datasheet Glk300_ce.

1.1.2 GLA-300 marking


The RTG unit are marked with an laser engraved label

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

1.2 The Cargo Temperature Unit


The CTU consists of a transmitter that can interface up to three
MN1535 PT-1000 temperature sensors. This unit is connected to
the RTG and uses the same cable as the RTG between hazardous
and safe area.

Figure 2 GC-300 Cargo Temperature Unit

1.3 The Signal Processing Unit


One Signal Processing Unit (SPU), GLK-300, is required for
each Radar Tank Gauge.
The SPU located in the system cabinet, consists of the
following:
Zener barriers, providing power to the RTG, digital interface
(RS-485) handling measuring signals from the RTG, and
HART communication for inert gas pressure and cargo
temperature measurements.
Dual high speed Ethernet communication to Remote Operator
Station (ROS).

Figure 3 GLK-300 Signal Processing Unit

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

1.1 Topology

Figure 4 GL-300 topology (example with 14 cargo tanks)


The topology of GL-300 Tank Monitoring is in short described
in the above figure. The connection of atmospheric pressure and
draft sensors will vary with different projects.
P-GL300/FE Rev. G

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

2 MAINTENANCE
2.1 Introduction
This chapter explains how to keep the system in good working
order and what to do if the system fails.
The following subjects are covered:
Overview.
Preventive maintenance.
Troubleshooting of all parts of the system.

2.2 Overview
This maintenance chapter is intended for trained maintenance
technicians or engineers with experience of electronic and
digital circuits, computers and electro mechanical design. The
level of information is based on Kongsberg Maritime
maintenance philosophy: The onboard technical personnel shall,
with the help of the documentation and the systems built-in test
functions, be able to identify malfunctions, locate the fault, and
replace major parts, modules and components on a Line
Replaceable Unit (LRU) level. He/she will however not
attempt to repair the LRUs.
Note

Cleaning with abrasive material or strong chemical cleaning


solutions is not recommended as these may damage the system.

2.3 Service and maintenance of the RTG


Due to the modular system design and the complexity of the
electronic circuitry, servicing the equipment if failures should
occur will be limited to replacement of malfunctioning boards
and complete electronics module assemblies.
A member of the ship crew being adequately familiar with the
GL-300 system may carry out replacement of boards.

10

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

The GLA-300 (RTG)


Heavy contamination on the antenna PTFE feed and the mirror
may cause erroneous readings.
If the system gives bad readings it is needed to clean both the
antenna feed and the mirror of the antenna.
The feed and the mirror must then be cleaned by spraying with a
cleaning agent if a jet nozzle is mounted on the tank adapter, or
by opening the inspection hatch of the tank adapter and wipe off
the feed and the mirror with a soft cloth (remark the special
condition for safe use above).
Liquid to be used depends on the liquid stored in the tank. If ice
on the surfaces, use Isopropanol, or for other types of
contamination use Petrol/Kerosene, Diesel etc. The feed is made
of PTFE and can withstand almost all liquids.
If failures should occur within the sensor unit electronics GLH300/GLH-310, the complete electronics unit (assembly) has to
be replaced.
A possible sensor electronics unit failure is indicated by error
codes, together with the LED's on the front of the GLK-300
being lit.
A description of how to replace a sensor electronics unit is
attached to the spare unit.

2.4 Preventive maintenance


2.4.1 General
Kongsberg Maritime recommends the following preventive
maintenance routine for the Kongsberg Tank Gauging System:

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

Weekly:

Clean all operator panels.


Check fault page.

3-Monthly:

Clean filter in cabinet door (if exist).


UPS/battery check.

Yearly:

Check cables and cable entrances, electrical


screw-terminals, fuse connections and plug
connections.

11

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

2.4.2 Weekly maintenance


Each week do the following for each of these Units:
1

Clean the surface of the units. Wipe the surfaces with a


clean damp cloth. For heavier cleaning, use a clean, damp
cloth which has been dipped in a solution of a mild dish
detergent and water. Wring out firmly before wiping the
unit. Never use cleaning solutions containing spirit or
alcohol.

Check the fault page if there is any fault reported.

2.4.3 3-monthly maintenance


Clean filter in cabinet door every 3 month
UPS/battery check:
3

Switch off the battery charger/power supply (often used is


Powec SC-8).

The battery capacity should be enough to run more than 15


minutes without any problem.

2.4.4 Yearly maintenance


Visual inspection of system parts is recommended to prevent
malfunctions and to ensure safe operation.
5

Check cables and cable entrances for damage to the cable.

Tighten all electrical screw-terminals.

Tighten all plug connections.

2.5 Deck installation


In general, equipment on deck (GLA-300 and GC-300) and
equipment inside the cabinet (GLK-300) do not need
maintenance. If deck equipment needs cleaning, please observe
that the following materials are used in the Radar Tank Gauge
and the Cargo Temperature Unit on deck;
All steel is AISI 316.
Sealing materials are Nitril EPDM

12

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

In case of special combinations of environmental conditions


outside and inside the tank, cleaning of the RTG antenna may be
necessary. The antenna inside the tank is shown in the below
figure, and has the following properties:
All steel is AISI 316.
PTFE in parabolic antenna.
O-ring material/type Kalrez 4079 and FEP.
For the RTG to function, only the front of the PTFE feed and the
mirror need to be sufficiently clean (depending on type and
amount of contamination).

FEP O-ring

Mirror

Kalrez 4079 O-ring

PTFE feed

Figure 5 GLA-300 offset parabolic antenna


The antenna is accessed by opening the cover on the Gauge
Socket (inspection hatch).
Warning: Observe procedures regarding access to the tank
atmosphere.

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

13

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

1. Flat gasket. Yard supply.


May differ in appearance.
2. Radar Tank Gauge GLA300.
3. M20 Hex Nut.
4. M20 Lock Washer.
5. M20x55 Hex Head Bolt.
6. Main cable.
7. Temperature connection
cable.
9. Tank Socket.

Figure 6 Installation of Radar Tank Gauge GLA-300

2.6 How to replace a broken SPU


2.6.1 Upgrade Handler software
The purposes of the GL-300 Upgrade Handler are to:

14

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

Enables the crew of the vessel to change a broken SPU (GLK-300)


without the attendance of a service engineer from Kongsberg
Maritime.
Enables the crew to run upgrades of the GL-300 system and GL-300
Upgrade Handler by running a file compiled by Kongsberg Maritime
without needing a service engineer from Kongsberg Maritime.
Enables the crew to export a file containing the SPU configuration
and abnormal reflection curves, and e-mail the file to the Kongsberg
Maritime for further analysis. The abnormal reflection curves are
reflection curves that are stored when SPU senses large deviations in
the ullage.

TheGL-300 Upgrade Handler continuously reads the configuration files and


abnormal reflection curves from the SPUs, the data are stored on the host
PC. The primary task of the GL-300 Upgrade Handler is to be triggered
when a SPU is changed with a spare unit. The program will then:
1. Change software of the new SPU in order to up/down-grade it to the
same version as the previous one.
2. Write the configuration of the previous SPU down to the new SPU.
3. Make sure that the new SPU contains the same software and
configuration as the previous.

The detailed procedure for this is described in the chapter Operational


procedures.
The GL-300 Upgrade Handler program will normally run on ROS 1 on KChief 500 system, however it may run on a stand-alone PC if no K-Chief
ROS is present.

2.6.2 Upgrade Handler interface


The GL-300 Upgrade Handler is available through the K-Chief 500 by:

1. Push Home on the keyboard to get to the home menu.


2. Push Service button on the screen.
3. Push GLK upgrade button on the screen.

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

15

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

If no K-Chief 500 is available and the program is running on a standalone


PC, the program has to be started from the startmenu.
Features of the program when installed with the K-Chief 500:
An alarm will sound on theK-chief500 if the GL-300 Upgrade Handler
stops running. Alarm tag: GLK300UpgradeHandler not running.
Program available through the K-Chief 500 user interface.
The program starts automatically when ROS 1 is started.
The program is only running on ROS 1, no redundancy on other ROSs
are available.

2.6.3 Operational procedures


This chapter describes the procedure which has to be performed when changing a broken
SPU with a spare. The spare unit may be a part of the ship store, or requested from
Kongsberg Maritime. The procedure is the same in both situations.
Procedure when changing a broken SPU with a spare unit:

1. Locate broken SPU


2. Disconnect all connectors to the SPU
3. Remove the fan-box

16

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

Figure 7 The fan box

4. Take out broken SPU by using a screwdriver to lift the metal-clip.

Figure 8 How to loosen the SPU

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

17

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

5. Slide the SPU out of the rack, this will power down the
SPU.

Figure 9 Sliding out the SPU


6. The spare unit has to be set to 00 on the address switches
before power-up.

18

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

Figure 10 Address switches set to 00


7. Power up the spare unit by inserting it to the location of the
previous SPU. The unit is powered up when inserted.

Figure 11 Inserting the SPU

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

19

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

8. The connector shall not be conneted at this stage. The


address switches has to be set to 00 prior to inserting the
unit. Factory settings will now be initiated.
9. Wait until all of the below indication is apparent:
Status LED is blinking red and green.
10. Power down the spare SPU unit, by pressing the PWR
switch. (Figure 14) (You can press the PWR switch by
using a paper clip or a thin screw driver)
11. Change the address switches to the same as the broken
SPU.
It is very important that all SPUs have unique address
settings, (duplicate addresses will lead to system
breakdown)
12. Before power-up verify that no other SPUs have the same
address setting on the switches.
13. Connect all connectors in the same positions as on the
broken SPU.
14. Power up the unit by pressing the PWR switch. (Figure 14)
15. The upgrade handler will now download required software
and configuration.

Figure 12 Upgrade Handler message during updating

20

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

16. The upgrade handler will reboot the SPU when it is


finished.
17. The procedure is finished when the status LED is green
and no other LED are lit.
18. Mount the fan-box on-top of the SPU.
19. The serial number in the upgrade handler will now
change to be the same as marked on the new SPU

Figure 13 The serial number

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

21

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Registered errors in the GL-300 are visualized by LEDs behind
the front cover of the actual GLK-300.

Power switch

Switches

Status LEDs

Figure 14 GLK-300 front layout


There are 5 different error categories:

22

SPU

ETH1

ETH2

HART

RADAR

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

SPU LED
This LED indicates internal error in the SPU. Restart the GLK300 by pressing the PWR-button twice. If a restart doesnt fix
the problem, the GLK-300 needs to be replaced.
ETH 1 LED or ETH 2 LED
These LEDs indicate that there is no connection on the specified
ethernet port. Troubleshooting is first done by restarting the
GLK-300 (press the PWR-button twice). If this doesnt help,
check all wires and switches connecting the GLK-300 with the
Operator Station. Cables may be interchanged on a switch to
find out if the switch causes the problem. The switches often
indicate connection by light symbols. If the error can not be
related to a cable or switch, replace the GLK-300.
HART LED
This LED indicates error related to the Hart sensors connected
to the GLK-300. First, try to restart the GLK-300 (press the
PWR-button twice). If the error is still present, find out which
sensors are connected to the GLK-300. Inspect the IAS to find
out which of the sensors that have erratic values. If only some of
the sensors have errors, the problem is probably related to the
specific sensors or the cabling near the sensors. If all sensors
have errors, the error may be in the GLK-300, the cable between
GLK-300 and the GLA-300 (RTG), or the GLA-300 unit itself.
For test, sensors may be interchanged with similar sensors
connected to another GLK-300. If the error follows the GLK300 and not the sensors, replace the GLK-300 unit. Cables may
be disconnected and checked for broken wires or short-circuits.
Contact KM service department for further help.

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

23

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

RADAR LED
This LED indicates error related to the GLA-300 unit. First, try
to restart the GLK-300 (press the PWR-button twice). If the
error is still present, disconnect the cable between GLK-300 and
GLA-300 and check for broken wires or short-circuits. If cables
seem OK, locate the defective unit by interchanging cables
between two GLK-300s (turn off the GLK-300s before
changing cables by pressing the PWR button once). If the
RADAR LED continues to light on the same GLK-300, this is
the defective unit that needs to be replaced. If the LED on the
other GLK-300 used for testing lights up, the GLH-300
electronic unit inside the GLA-300 Radar Tank Gauge on deck
is the defective unit that needs to be replaced. A description of
how to change this unit is attached to the spare unit.

3.1 Power up the GLKs after fault situation


In the cabinet a sticker is placed informing you to have a delay
for minimum 10 sec before switching on the power to the GLK300 units if any fault situation have made it necessary to power
down the GLKs.
Its important that you follow this instruction

3.2 Fault and fault presentation


There are several different faults that can be indicated on the
GLK-300 and also presented in the K-Chief presentation
program.

3.2.1 GLK-300 power failure


All the GLK-300 LEDs are dark.

24

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

The following alarms will show in the alarm list in the bottom
field of the K-Chief view.

3.2.2 Ethernet 1 broken


The ETH 1 LED and the STATUS LED will be red.

The following alarm will show in the alarm list in the bottom
field of the K-Chief view.

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

25

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

In addition, a system failure alarm will be indicated in the alarm


page.

3.2.3 Ethernet 2 broken


The ETH 2 LED and the STATUS LED will be red.

The following alarm will show in the alarm list in the bottom
field of the K-Chief view.

In addition, a system failure alarm will be indicated in the alarm


page.

26

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

3.2.4 Hart line between GLK and GLB broken


The HART LED and the STATUS LED will be red

The following alarms will show in the alarm list in the bottom
field of the K-Chief view. This is only the 4 latest alarms. In this
situation 9 cargo alarms are provoked.

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

27

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

All the provoked alarms can be found in the alarm page.

3.2.5 GLB power failure


When the GLB card has lost power, the RADAR LED and the
STATUS LED will be red.

28

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

The following alarms will show in the alarm list in the bottom
field of the K-Chief view. This is only the 4 latest alarms. In this
situation 5 cargo alarms are provoked.

All the provoked alarms can be found in the alarm page

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

29

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

3.2.6 RS-485 between GLK and GLB broken


When the RS-485 communication cable is broken the RADAR
LED and the STATUS LED will be red.

30

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

The following alarms will show in the alarm list in the bottom
field of the K-Chief view. This is only the 4 latest alarms. In this
situation 5 cargo alarms are provoked.

All the provoked alarms can be found in the alarm page

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

31

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

3.2.7 Temperature sensor failure


If one single temperature sensor fails, this will not be indicated
on the GLK-300. The STATUS LED will be green.

32

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

The following alarms will show in the alarm list in the bottom
field of the K-Chief view, indicating which temperature sensor
that has failed.

In addition the alarms can be found in the alarm page.

3.2.8 GC-300 communication to GLK-300 broken


When the communication to the GC-300 is broken all
temperature sensor will have invalid values and show an alarm.
The STATUS LED will be red.

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

33

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

The following alarms will show in the alarm list in the bottom
field of the K-Chief view. This is only the 4 latest alarms. In this
situation 7 cargo alarms are provoked.

In addition the alarms can be found in the alarm page.

34

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

3.2.9 Inert pressure failure


The HART LED and the STATUS LED will be red

The following alarms will show in the alarm list in the bottom
field of the K-Chief view.

There are two conditions for the CT01_IG sensor failure, but
this is counted as one alarm.
In addition the alarms can be found in the alarm page.
Notice that only two alarms are listed, not 3.

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

35

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

36

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

4 FAQ

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

37

K-Gauge CLS 600


Operator Manual

385541/B
November 2013

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Document history
Document number: 385541 / Revision B
Rev. A

August 2013

First version.

Rev. B

November 2013

Updated product name. Added MiscTanksListView

The reader
This operator manual describes how to use the K-Gauge CLS 600 based on K-Chief 600. The operator
should be experienced in the operation of alarm and monitoring systems and have basic knowledge
of personal computers.

Note
The information contained in this document remains the sole property of Kongsberg Maritime AS. No
part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means, and the information
contained within it is not to be communicated to a third party, without the prior written consent of
Kongsberg Maritime AS.
Kongsberg Maritime AS endeavours to ensure that all information in this document is correct and fairly
stated, but does not accept liability for any errors or omissions.

Warning
The equipment to which this manual applies must only be used for the purpose for which it was
designed. Improper use or maintenance may cause damage to the equipment and/or injury to personnel.
The user must be familiar with the contents of the appropriate manuals before attempting to operate
or work on the equipment.
Kongsberg Maritime disclaims any responsibility for damage or injury caused by improper installation,
use or maintenance of the equipment.

Comments
To assist us in making improvements to the product and to this manual, we welcome comments and
constructive criticism.
e-mail: km.documentation@kongsberg.com

Kongsberg Maritime AS
www.kongsberg.com

Operator Manual

Table of contents
1

INTRODUCTION............................................................... 5

2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................................... 6


System architecture ................................................................................................6
System functionality...............................................................................................7
Network ..................................................................................................................8
Power....................................................................................................................10
Integration and interfaces .....................................................................................10
Main building blocks............................................................................................12

3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18

USER INTERFACE........................................................... 15
Common Ship View .............................................................................................16
Cargo Tanks List View .........................................................................................21
Cargo Tanks Group View .....................................................................................23
Cargo Tanks Density View ...................................................................................28
Cargo Tanks Temperatures View..........................................................................31
Cargo Tanks Line Pressures View ........................................................................32
Cargo Tanks ETC View ........................................................................................34
Cargo High Level Alarm View.............................................................................36
Ballast Tanks List View........................................................................................38
Ballast Tanks Group View....................................................................................40
Ballast Tanks ETC View.......................................................................................43
Service Tanks List View .......................................................................................45
Service Tanks Group View ...................................................................................47
Misc. Tanks List View..........................................................................................50
Misc. Pressures View ...........................................................................................52
Misc. Temperatures View.....................................................................................54
Vapour Line Pressures View.................................................................................56
Stability from Load Calculator View ...................................................................59

4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES ......................................... 60


Zero Adjustment of Inert Pressure sensor ............................................................61
Zero Adjustment of pressure sensor .....................................................................63
Density Adjustment ..............................................................................................65
Cargo Temperature Offset Adjustment.................................................................66

385541/B

K-Gauge CLS 600

385541/B

Introduction

1 Introduction

The purpose of this Operator Manual is to provide the descriptions and procedures
required to allow for safe and efficient use of the K-Gauge CLS 600. A thorough
understanding of system functions and controls is necessary to optimize overall
performance. Careful study of the information in this manual is highly recommended,
preferably while exploring the systems various functions. System operation is a
dynamic activity requiring regular adjustments and fine tuning to achieve the best
possible results under varying environmental conditions.
Note

The K-Gauge CLS 600 is a modular system, consisting of standard main units such
as Operator Stations, Operator Panels and processing and I/O units. For a specific
project configuration, the choice and quantities of items may vary and may depend
on ship and class.
Important

Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows 7 are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.

Related documents
[338857] Kongsberg K-Chief 600 Operators Manual
[311956] Kongsberg K-Chief 600 Installation Manual
[346036] Merchant Marine Acronyms and abbreviations

385541/B

K-Gauge CLS 600

2 System description

2.1 System architecture


The K-Gauge CLS 600 is based on the K-Chief 600 Marine Automation System
platform. The K-Chief 600 system architecture has a modular design, and builds on
Operator Stations and I/O modules interconnected by local data networks. This allows
us to meet individual ship owners requirements using standard modules. Different
selections of these units are used to configure each individual system.
Figure 1

K-Chief 600 system architecture

The K-Chief 600 is decentralised for safety and ease of installation, but operation is
centralised using the Operator Stations. Each I/O module has a specific role and is
configured to match the operational requirements of the specific process area. Due to

385541/B

System description

this flexible architecture, the K-Chief 600 system can connect more I/O modules in the
network at a later stage. This may be done to control additional process areas, or to
extend the functionality.

2.2 System functionality


Operator interaction
The Operator Stations provide the operator with
a number of standard display pictures. Control
and detailed information of any of the Distributed
Processing Units can be observed and performed from
the Operator Stations.
Sensor data can be presented as a bar graph or a
trend curve. Selected sensor data may be printed
automatically at fixed intervals if a printer is part of the system. The system can display
the latest alarms for each alarm group individually or all active alarms.
Whenever a variable or state changes significantly, the relevant Distributed Processing
Unit updates the database in each of the Operator Stations. This means that data displayed
at any Operator Station is always up to date. There is no need to request data each time
the operator wishes to inspect a variable. As a result of this, the data traffic on the process
bus and the Local Area Network is kept to a minimum, giving extremely fast data access.
All changes in measuring points from the DPUs are logged and time stamped with
precision of up to 1 millisecond. They are stored redundantly in all Operator Stations for
the last seven days and can be displayed in trend views. A change is recorded each time
a value oversteps the set deadband limit. Changes in measuring points are sampled with
a rate of up to 100 samples pr. second.
All digital process and alarm events are time stamped with precision up to 1 millisecond.
Data are stored redundantly in all Operator Stations for 5 years. They can be displayed in
the event history view.

385541/B

K-Gauge CLS 600

Access and control transfer


Classification requirements state that equipment control must only
be available from one location at any time. The K-Chief 600 access
control transfer system allows organized control transfer from one
location to another. By using the command buttons on the dedicated
Operator Panel, access and control can be easily administrated.
Request control is used to gain control of an alarm group. The
Operator Station having control of this group, now receives a
message requesting either to accept or deny the request.
Another control function event is to override access. If an emergency situation occurs, it
is possible to take control over an alarm group. In this case the process of accepting and
denying is not needed. A password must however be given to get the wanted control.
Operators must be logged on as Chief (Power user) to override access.
Alarm and monitoring
The alarm and monitoring system constitute the basic
functionality of the K-Chief 600 marine automation
system. The main purpose of the system is to give ship
officers all the basic alarm and status information they
require to maintain safe and efficient operation of the
machinery and other related equipment.
The logging printer and the colour graphics display records all status changes, such as
alarm acknowledgements and alarm condition cleared. When all alarm conditions are
cleared, the system returns to normal. Alarm limits and delays are adjustable by using
the Operator Panel. A counter function keeps track of running hours for engines, pumps
and related items. This function can also accumulate flow. Counter values are shown on
the colour graphics display or may be printed.
Some of the alarms are conditional and will be blocked when a specified condition is
present. For instance, when the system is set in At Sea mode, all level alarms from
ballast tanks are blocked. This function is started by defining a signal as an inhibit signal
for a specified alarm or a specified group of alarms.

2.3 Network
OS network
The OS network is a redundant Local Area Network (LAN) employed for communication
between the Operator Stations and the process area via Segment Controller Units (SCUs).
Other PC based equipment (printers, switches) are also connected to the OS network.
The LAN is an open net employing international standard protocols (Ethernet, TCP/IP)
that permits connection and data exchange using Kongsberg Maritime standard interface
programs.

385541/B

System description

Process network
The process network is used for communication between the I/O units (Distributed
Processing Units) in the process area. Segregation of the automation system is provided
by setting up autonomous segments of local systems using a number of different
Distributed Processing Units (DPUs). Such local systems can be valve control, pump
control, power management, propulsion control, cargo control etc. The Segment
Controller Unit (SCU) is used as the gateway to the OS for the various segments to
which the DPUs are connected.
A redundant Controller Area Network (CAN) bus is employed for communication
between the DPUs in the process area. The CAN segments are compliant with the
CANopen framework for maritime electronics (CiA 307). Communication between
the SCUs is employed either using the CANopen standard or using Ethernet Powerlink
(EPL). Powerlink is a communication profile for Real-Time Ethernet (RTE). It extends
Ethernet according to the IEEE 802.3 standard with mechanisms to transfer data with
predictable timing and precise synchronisation.
Serial lines
Serial lines are used for communication from DPUs to third party systems. The type
of serial line to be used in the system depends on the application, but the RS-422 and
RS-485 standards are both commonly used, with a large number of different protocols.
The Modbus TCP/IP interface can also be used.
All network traffic is monitored from all Operator Stations. Statistics are displayed, and
alarms are issued if network interfaces are not functioning.

385541/B

K-Gauge CLS 600

2.4 Power
The K-Chief 600 system normally requires 230 VAC power supply for Operator Stations
and 24 VDC power supply for Distributed Processing Units.
Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) can be used to protect Operator Stations and
DPUs from problems associated with utility power, poor quality, or a complete loss of
power. The UPS is then used to maintain a constant voltage, and if needed, isolate the
output to the critical load. These actions help to keep power line problems from reaching
the critical systems, where they can damage both hardware and software, causing the
equipment to operate erratically.
In a situation where the incoming main power is completely cut off, the energy stored
in the UPS continue to provide power. A 30 minutes back-up is normally sufficient to
keep the system operational until power is restored. This is also normally a requirement
from the classification societies.
All 24 VDC UPSes have earth fault detection, and any detected earth fault is given as a
common alarm to the operator.

2.5 Integration and interfaces


Modular design allows flexibility in configuring the system to individual requirements,
covering the whole range from low complexity alarm systems to highly integrated alarm
and monitoring systems with advanced process control. Sub-systems can include all or
any combination of the following:
Alarm and monitoring system
Auxiliary control system
Power management system
Cargo control system
Propulsion control
Ballast automation system
Vessel performance system
HVAC (air conditioning)
Anti-heeling
Reefer monitoring
Fire system
Main Engine monitoring system
The K-Chief 600 system can be used as a stand-alone system, but it may also be
interfaced with other systems. The following list shows examples of systems.
K-Gauge The K-Gauge is a cargo monitoring and control system which is a highly
integrated system incorporating level gauging, temperature and pressure monitoring,
valve and pump control.

10

385541/B

System description

K-log The K-Log Electronic Logbooks are designed to replace the traditional paper
logbooks. K-Log supports event based recording of data related to navigation, engine
watch, port calls and other operational activities.
Auto Chief C20 The Auto Chief C20 is a propulsion control system which can
be adapted to various engines.
Main Engine monitoring system The ME monitoring system monitoring the
conditions of Main Engine; Bearing Wear alarm handling, Cylinder Liner temperature
and detections of scuffing of piston wall, main bearing temperature, cross-head
bearing and crank bearing temperature, torque measurements, Water In Oil Detection.
The Main Engine monitoring is under constant development to meet the modern
requirements of such a system.
Ship@Web The Ship@Web system enables continuous access to primary vessel
data both on board the vessel and from ashore.
Voyage Data Recorder The main purpose of our Voyage Data Recorder (VDR)
the Maritime Black Box MBB is to record and store relevant ship data and allow
reconstruction of ship incidents at sea.
External VDR.
Serial interface to external systems for instance a fire system or a level gauging
system.

385541/B

11

K-Gauge CLS 600

2.6 Main building blocks


Operator Stations
The K-Chief 600 system can be operated
through a number of Operator Stations
installed in a number of different ways, for
example in a standard Kongsberg Maritime
console or as separate units for desktop
operation.
The standard K-Chief 600 Operator Station
environment consists of the following
main units:
A Windows based personal computer
(PC)
One or two colour monitors for
presentation of information
A Control Room Panel (CRP) - a
K-Chief 600 specific operator panel
An optional Touch Screen Panel (TCP)
Other optional operator panels
Optional printers
Computer (PC)
The K-Chief 600 computer is an industrial small form factor PC. Due to its space-saving
design, the size of the chassis is only two-thirds the size of an average desktop PC.
The PC is type-approved by all major Classification Societies when it is installed in
conjunction with our mariner kit for horizontal or vertical mounting.
Monitors
The colour monitor is used to display the operator images of the K-Chief 600 system. It
uses thin film transistor (TFT) liquid crystal display (LCD) technology to ensure high
image quality. The monitors are commercial off-the-shelf, but are all type-approved
for maritime use. Monitors are available both in standard and in wide screen formats,
with screen sizes ranging from 19 to 27. The monitors can be delivered with kits for
installation into a console, on the wall or for desktop mounting.
Operator panels
The Operator Panels are used to interact with the images on the Operator Station's colour
monitor, hence controlling the processes. Such a process could be to display a new image
or to act upon an element within an image. The layout of the buttons, lamps and controls
on the Operator Panel is dependent on the panel type. The panels are designed for
various methods of installation, but are primarily intended for mounting into a console.

12

385541/B

System description

Control Room Panel (CRP)


The CRP is a specially designed operator panel for
easy access and operation of the K-Chief 600 system.
Operational processes are performed using the
mechanical trackball and its associated buttons to
point at and click symbols and menus on the colour
monitor.
The CRP is used in well-lit environments, and
therefore has no background lightning.
Printers
Commercial laser printers or dot matrix printers can be supplied for printing of alarms
and logs. Note that as the complete alarm history is stored by the K-Chief 600 system, a
dedicated alarm printer is optional.
Touch panel
The Touch panel is a multipurpose operator panel
designed to be placed in several locations on the ship.
It is delivered with a 13 screen size. It allows alarm
indication, process control and power management.
Operation is performed on a high resolution colour
graphical touch display. For small segregated alarm
systems it can be the only operator panel. The Touch
panel contains a symbol library for presentation of process control equipment and it
uses these to display process diagrams.
The Touch panel gives the operator the possibility to:
Monitor the status of any object, from a single input signal to a controllable object
Be informed of any process- or system alarm, through visual and audible signals
Control processes using the touch screen and graphical feedback
Distributed Processing Units
provides several models of Distributed Processing Units (DPU) to handle different types
of I/O and applications. Each Distributed Processing Unit type has a specific capacity in
number and type of analogue or digital input and output (I/O) channels.

385541/B

13

K-Gauge CLS 600

To configure the tasks for a specific Distributed


Processing Unit, parameters are loaded into the
unit. This allows it to perform alarm functions,
control functions, safety or any combination
of these, and makes it easy to separate system
functions.
When an unacceptable condition is detected, they
generate an alarm signal, identify the responsible
sensor, and provide information about the condition.
All Distributed Processing Unit types have been qualified according to the latest revision
of the IACS E10 test procedure, satisfying the requirements for placement in the most
demanding locations. All Distributed Processing Units can be mounted directly on
diesel engines or similar locations without shock absorbers. Only Ingress Protection
(IP) may be needed.
The Distributed Processing Units are CE marked as required for some European Union
flagstate vessels. They also meet the requirements to use the Wheel Mark defined by
the European Union Maritime Directive (EMD), satisfying all the new Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) requirements.

14

385541/B

User Interface

3 User Interface

This chapter gives an overview of the K-Gauge CLS 600s graphical user interface,
including its features, requirements and options. General operation of K-Chief 600 is
described in detail in Operators Manual for K-Chief 600 (doc. 338857).
Topics
Common Ship View on page 16
Cargo Tanks List View on page 21
Cargo Tanks Group View on page 23
Cargo Tanks Density View on page 28
Cargo Tanks Temperatures View on page 31
Cargo High Level Alarm View on page 36
Cargo Tanks Line Pressures View on page 32
Cargo Tanks ETC View on page 34
Cargo High Level Alarm View on page 36
Ballast Tanks List View on page 38
Ballast Tanks Group View on page 40
Ballast Tanks ETC View on page 43
Service Tanks List View on page 45
Service Tanks Group View on page 47
Misc. Pressures View on page 52
Misc. Temperatures View on page 54
Vapour Line Pressures View on page 56
Stability from Load Calculator View on page 59

on page

385541/B

15

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.1 Common Ship View


In top of all tank mimics there are shown common ship data like Trim, List, Layoutof
tanks, Draft and Atmospheric pressure
Trim/List
Trim and list are shown on left side at top of every tank list view or tank group view.

With privilege of Chief it is possible to set a fixed value of trim and list. A fixed value is
shown with blue background. By a mouse click on the value field of either trim or list, a
dialog appear where the value can be inserted.

For trim or list simply select Fixed in dropdown menu and then click on the value field
(within the four corners surrounding the value). Trim fixed value or List fixed value dialog
appear where the values can be inserted.

16

385541/B

User Interface

Tank layout
Tank layout shows placement of tanks when Cargo, Ballast, Service or Misc tanks view
is selected.

Draft
Draft view supports different configuration of draft sensors. Only draft sensors that
are present and configured will be shown.

By a mouse click on value field for each draft sensor, a small dialog will be displayed.

385541/B

17

K-Gauge CLS 600

Then by clicking on chevron button


a new window appears with five panes:
Summary, Trend, Alarm parameters, Parameters and IO tags

18

385541/B

User Interface

385541/B

19

K-Gauge CLS 600

In bottom right corner of Draft view, the value of sea water density is shown (if part of
configuration for this vessel) used for calculation of draft values. With privilege of
Chief it is possible to set a fixed value of sea water density. A fixed value is shown
with blue background. By a mouse click on the value field , a Sea water density dialog
appear where the value can be inserted.

Atmospheric pressure
Atmospheric pressure is shown on top right side on tank mimics.
With privilege of Chief it is possible to set a fixed value for the atmospheric pressure.
A fixed value is shown with blue background. By a mouse click on the value field for
atmospheric pressure, a dialog appear where the value can be inserted.

Simply select Fixed in dropdown menu and then click on the value field where the
values may be inserted.

20

385541/B

User Interface

3.2 Cargo Tanks List View


Purpose
This view show all values and data for one cargo tank in one line. It is possible to edit
Tank Content, Content Type and Inert Pressure Sensor Offset if the corresponding optional

column is activated.
View options
The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or
hidden. Two options are available:
Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual
columns selectable being dependent on the active view)
Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history
This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.
Select all

385541/B

21

K-Gauge CLS 600

With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and
edit all tags in a column simultaneously.
Edit selected
Selected tag(s) may be edited

22

385541/B

User Interface

3.3 Cargo Tanks Group View


Purpose
The purpose of Cargo Tank Group View is to give more graphical and complete
information about the tanks in scope of attention. The user can make its own tank groups
with all necessary information available.
Default Cargo Tank Group View shows all tanks.

Group Dialog
To create a new custom cargo tank group, just click the plus sign to the right of the
Overview tab.
A new group appear in an empty tab called New group. To edit this new group click
on Group manager.

385541/B

23

K-Gauge CLS 600

Group manager
In Group manager it is possible to
give the group a name
add tanks to the group by marking the check box
describe tank content for each tank
give each tank an individual colour
or give all tanks same colour

24

385541/B

User Interface

385541/B

25

K-Gauge CLS 600

Optional rows
Some of the rows beneath the bargraphs are optional. The operator choose what process
value to display.
Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history
This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view

26

385541/B

User Interface

This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.

385541/B

27

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.4 Cargo Tanks Density View


Purpose
The purpose of this view is to show density of cargo for each cargo tank on one line.
Content Type
Content type may be set from either Cargo Tank View or from Cargo Density View.
By a left click on a Content Type cell, a dialog will appear where the operator can
choose correct content for this tank. Density calculation method is linked to Content
Type.

28

385541/B

User Interface

View options
The Options button is used to customize which optional column to be displayed or
hidden. Two options are available:
Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual
columns selectable being dependent on the active view)
Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history
This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.
Select all
With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and
edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

385541/B

29

K-Gauge CLS 600

Edit selected
Selected tag(s) may be edited

30

385541/B

User Interface

3.5 Cargo Tanks Temperatures View


Purpose
The purpose for Cargo Temperature View is to show all measured and calculated
temperatures for one tank in one line. Submerged temperature sensors are shown with an
In Liquid symbol

Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history
This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.

385541/B

31

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.6 Cargo Tanks Line Pressures View


Purpose
The purpose for Cargo Lines View is to show all measured and calculated values for
cargo lines.
View options
The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or
hidden. Two options are available:
Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual
columns selectable being dependent on the active view)
Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history
This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.
Select all

32

385541/B

User Interface

With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and
edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

385541/B

33

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.7 Cargo Tanks ETC View


Purpose
The purpose for Cargo Tank ETC View is to show Estimated Time to Completion (ETC)
of loading or discharging of tanks involved with current flow rate (volume or weight rate).
Target value of loading/discharging
To calculate the time to finish of loading/discharging it is needed a target volume. With
Chief privileges it is possible to insert/change value of Target volume high for loading
cargo by selecting a cell or the whole column. Likewise for Target volume low when

discharging cargo.

View options
The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or
hidden. Two options are available:
Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual
columns selectable being dependent on the active view)
Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

34

385541/B

User Interface

Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history
This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.
Select all
With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and
edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

385541/B

35

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.8 Cargo High Level Alarm View


Purpose
The purpose for Cargo High Level Alarm View is to show state of the High Level
Alarm system.
High Level Alarm: 95 % of tank volume.
Overfill Alarm: 98 % of tank volume.

Alarm
When an alarm occur the colour of the diode connected to the tank and alarm limit
changes to red. In addition the external horn and rotation light is switched on.
Silence off external horn and rotating light
Dedicated horn and rotating light for the high level alarm system can be silenced by
using the Silence button located at the top bar.
Alarm Blocking and Seagoing mode
Each alarm can be blocked individually by using the Block button. A blocked alarm is
identified by a blue background colour.
When the vessel is set in seagoing mode, all alarms are blocked. To be able to set the
vessel in this mode you need to be logged on as Chief.

36

385541/B

User Interface

Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history
This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.
Select all
With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and
edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

385541/B

37

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.9 Ballast Tanks List View


Purpose
The purpose of Ballast Tanks View is to show measured and calculated values for all
ballast tanks.

View options
The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or
hidden. Two options are available:
Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual
columns selectable being dependent on the active view)
Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

38

385541/B

User Interface

Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history
This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.
Select all
With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and
edit all tags in column simultaneously.
Edit selected
Selected tag(s) may be edited

385541/B

39

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.10 Ballast Tanks Group View


Purpose
The purpose of Ballast Tanks Group View is to give more graphical and complete
information about the ballast tanks in scope of attention. The user can make its own tank
groups with all necessary information available.
Default Ballast Tanks Group View show all tanks.

Group Dialog
To create a new custom ballast tank group, just click the plus sign to the right of the
Overview tab.
A new group appear in an empty tab called New group. To edit this new group click
on Group manager
Group manager
In Group manager it is possible to
give the group a name
add tanks to the group by marking the check box
describe tank content for each tank
give each tank an individual colour or
give all tanks same colour

40

385541/B

User Interface

The configured content and colour in the new group can be seen in the group view:

Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history

385541/B

41

K-Gauge CLS 600

This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.

42

385541/B

User Interface

3.11 Ballast Tanks ETC View


Purpose
The purpose for Ballast Tank ETC View is to show Estimated Time to Completion (ETC)
of loading or discharging of tanks involved with current flow rate (volume or weight rate).
Target value of loading/discharging
To calculate the time to finish of loading/discharging it is needed a target volume. With
Chief privileges it is possible to insert/change value of Target volume high for filling of
ballast water by selecting a cell or the whole column. Likewise for Target volume low

when emptying of ballast water.

View options
The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or
hidden. Two options are available:
Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual
columns selectable being dependent on the active view)
Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

385541/B

43

K-Gauge CLS 600

Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history
This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.
Select all
With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and
edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

44

385541/B

User Interface

3.12 Service Tanks List View


Purpose
The purpose of Service Tank View is to show all measured and calculated values for all
service tanks.

View options
The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or
hidden. Two options are available:
Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual
columns selectable being dependent on the active view)
Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

385541/B

45

K-Gauge CLS 600

Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history
This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.
Select all
With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and
edit all tags in a column simultaneously.
Edit selected
Selected tag(s) may be edited

46

385541/B

User Interface

3.13 Service Tanks Group View


Purpose
The purpose of Service Tank Group view is to give more graphical and complete
information about the service tanks in scope of attention. The user can make its own tank
groups with all necessary information available.
Default service Tank Group View show all tanks.

Group Dialog
To create a new custom ballast tank group, just click the plus sign to the right of the
Overview tab.
A new group appear in an empty tab called New group. To edit this new group click
on Group manager
Group manager
In Group manager it is possible to
give the group a name
add tanks to the group by marking the check box
describe tank content for each tank
give each tank an individual colour or
give all tanks same colour

385541/B

47

K-Gauge CLS 600

The configured content and colour in the new group can be seen in the group view

48

385541/B

User Interface

Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history
This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.

385541/B

49

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.14 Misc. Tanks List View


Purpose
The purpose of the Misc. Tanks List View is to show all measured and calculated values
for all misc. tanks.

View options
The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or
hidden. Two options are available:
Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual
columns selectable being dependent on the active view)
Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

50

385541/B

User Interface

Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history
This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.
Select all
With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and
edit all tags in a column simultaneously.
Edit selected
Selected tag(s) may be edited

385541/B

51

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.15 Misc. Pressures View


Purpose
The purpose of Misc. Pressures View is to show all miscellaneous pressures in the
system that do not fall into a category shown by any other view.

View options
The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or
hidden. Two options are available:
Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual
columns selectable being dependent on the active view)
Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

52

385541/B

User Interface

Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history
This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.
Select all
With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and
edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

385541/B

53

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.16 Misc. Temperatures View


Purpose
The purpose of Misc. Temperatures View is to show all measured that do not fall into a
category shown by any other view.

View options
The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or
hidden. Two options are available:
Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual
columns selectable being dependent on the active view)
Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

54

385541/B

User Interface

Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history
This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.
Select all
With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and
edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

385541/B

55

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.17 Vapour Line Pressures View


Purpose
The purpose of Vapour Line Pressures View is to give the operator an overview of usage
of the vapour lines on the vessel. It is a completely manual configurabel view done by
the operator. Each vapour line on the vessel can be given a separate colour. When a tank
is connected to this vapour line, the tank in ship layout will have a frame with this colour.

To configure a vapour line, do as follow:


1

Select a colour for the vapour line to configure by double click on the laying
bargraph.

Add tanks to be connected to this vapour line by clicking on Select tanks button in
column Select tank for vapour line. Mark the check box for the tanks wanted to be
connected to this vapour line.

56

385541/B

User Interface

Note

It is not possible to select a tank connected to another vapour line

In Ship layout it is now possible to see which tank that is connected to this vapour
line. It is indicated with a frame on the tank with same colour as the laying bargraph
has for the vapour line.

Three vapour lines connected to respectively CT01, CT05 and CT08.


Note

To achive a view that gives best information it might be a good practice to give different
colour to different cargo

View options
The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or
hidden. Two options are available:
Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual
columns selectable being dependent on the active view)
Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

385541/B

57

K-Gauge CLS 600

Context menu
The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The
following items can be selected:
View history
This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected
tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply,
then right-clicking the object is disabled.
Send to trend
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views.
Send to custom view
This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.
Select all
With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and
edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

58

385541/B

User Interface

3.18 Stability from Load Calculator View


Purpose
The purpose of the Loading Calculator view is to show stability data from the Loading
Calculator in a K-Chief 600 Operator Station. With this view it is possible to see
the vessels over all bending moment, shear force and stability. The operator dont
need to move to the Loading Calculator computer to see the ships stability during
loading/discharging.

385541/B

59

K-Gauge CLS 600

4 Operational Procedures

Topics
Zero Adjustment of Inert Pressure sensor on page 61
Zero Adjustment of pressure sensor on page 63
Density Adjustment on page 65
Cargo Temperature Offset Adjustment on page 66

60

385541/B

Operational Procedures

4.1 Zero Adjustment of Inert Pressure


sensor
The inert pressure sensor on cargo tanks can be zero adjusted in SW within a limited
band by subtracting the atmosphere pressure when the tank is opened.
Important

Prior to this zero adjustment algorithm the cargo tank must be ventilated to achieve the
same pressure as the surrounding atmosphere pressure

Open CargoTankListView in K-Chief 600

Log on with Chief privileges or higher to be able to edit offset.


(if Inert press. offset column is not visible click on Option, then Optional columnsand
select Inert pres. offset.)

Click on offset cell and a dialog appears.

Click on Resetto remove any old sensor offset.

385541/B

61

K-Gauge CLS 600

Click on Set to zero adjust the sensor and then the procedure is finished.

Note

If a new sensor is installed the old zeroing offset value must be removed. This is done by
running this zeroing algorithm including to pt. 4

62

385541/B

Operational Procedures

4.2 Zero Adjustment of pressure sensor


When KM pressure sensors are used the sensors can be zero adjusted in SW within a
limited band.
This can be done by double clicking on the value in the Pressure sensor (mWC) column
in the tank list view. If the column is not visible press the Options button and Optional
Columns to select which columns to be displayed.
If the deviation is within the legal range a dialog box will appear:

Select Start Zeroing to adjust the sensor. Confirm the operation after ensuring the
displayed conditions are met.

When the zeroing is done the adjusted value is displayed.

385541/B

63

K-Gauge CLS 600

Note

If a new sensor is installed the zeroing must be removed. This is done by selecting the
reset sensor button on the operator dialog displayed.
Note

If the Tank Sounding System is delivered together with C-Loading loading computer, zero
adjusted pressure value may be sent from the Tank Sounding System to the loading
computer for calculation on level.

64

385541/B

Operational Procedures

4.3 Density Adjustment


With privilege of Chief it is possible to set density of tank content. By a mouse click on
value field of density for a the tank, a dialog appear where the value can be inserted.

For service tanks the density at 15 C should be inserted, in addition the actual
temperature of the content can be inserted to calculate the actual density of the tank
content.

Note

If the Tank Sounding System is delivered together with C-Loading loading computer,
density may be sent from the Tank Sounding System to the loading computer.

385541/B

65

K-Gauge CLS 600

4.4 Cargo Temperature Offset Adjustment


With privilege of Chief it is possible to set an offset value on cargo temperature sensor.
1

Open CargoTemperatureView in K-Chief 600

Log on with Chief privileges or higher to be able to edit offset.


(if temperature sensor offset column is not visible click on Option, then Optional
columnsand select the offset for the wanted temperature sensor).
(if Inert press. offset column is not visible click on Option and Optional columns
view this column.

Click on offset cell, enter offset value and click OK in dialog that appears.

Note

If a new temperature sensor is installed the old offset value (if any) must be removed.

66

385541/B

K-Gauge CLS 600

67

385541/B

2013

Kongsberg Maritime

Installation manual

Installation Manual
GL-300 Tank Monitoring

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Revisions

Rev.
A
B
C
D
E

Written by
Date
2009-04-15
2009-06-28
2009-11-02
2010-03-24
2010-12-15

Checked by
Date
2009-04-16
2009-06-29
2009-11-12
2010-03-24
2010-12-15

Sign.
KSI
KSI
BMF
BMF
BMF

Sign.
BMF
BMF
HJH
HJH
AAS

Approved by
Date
2009-04-17
2009-06-29
2009-11-12
2010-03-24
2010-12-15

Sign.
BHJ
BHJ
KSI
BHJ
BHJ

Document history

Rev. A
Rev. B
Rev.C
Rev.D
Rev.E

First edition
Updated figures
Updated figures
Added slop tank solution and minor text corrections according to comments.
Request information sheet removed and established as own document.
Added Horn solution for bitumen tanks and updated figures.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice.
Kongsberg Maritime AS shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental
or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this
document.
2010 Kongsberg Maritime AS. All rights reserved. No part of this work covered by
the copyright hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied without prior permission
from Kongsberg Maritime AS.

Kongsberg Maritime AS
NO-7005 Trondheim
Norway

Phone:
+47 73 58 10 00
Fax:
+47 73 58 10 01
www.kongsberg.com
E-mail: km.sales@kongsberg.com

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Table of contents
1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................... 7
1.1
About the manual ................................................................................................... 7
1.2
The reader ............................................................................................................... 7
1.3
Purpose ................................................................................................................... 7
1.4
Reference documentation ....................................................................................... 8
2 ABOUT TANK MONITORING ............................................................................ 9
2.1
KONGSBERG Tank Monitoring ........................................................................... 9
2.2
Topology diagram for GL-300 Tank Monitoring ................................................. 11
2.3
Applications .......................................................................................................... 12
3 STORAGE, TRANSPORTATION AND UNPACKING ................................... 13
3.1
Storage .................................................................................................................. 13
3.2
Transportation ....................................................................................................... 13
3.3
Unpacking, dismantling ........................................................................................ 13
4 PROJECTING AND SYSTEM DELIVERY ...................................................... 14
4.1
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 14
4.2
Projecting schedule ............................................................................................... 14
5 LOCATION OF THE RADAR TANK GAUGE ................................................ 15
5.1
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 15
5.1.1

Locating the Radar Tank Gauge ............................................................... 15

5.1.2
Reflections from obstacles........................................................................ 15
5.2
Free-space requirements and methods to reduce the influence of obstructions ... 16
5.2.1

Methods to reduce the influence of obstructions ...................................... 17

5.2.2

Corner reflectors ....................................................................................... 18

5.2.3

Longitudinal frames in the primary cone ................................................. 20

5.2.4

Radar Tank Gauge close to bulkhead ....................................................... 21

5.2.5

Platforms, staircases and horizontal girders ............................................. 26

5.2.6

Heating coils in antenna zone ................................................................... 27

5.2.7

Cargo inlet ................................................................................................ 28

5.2.8

Inert gas inlet ............................................................................................ 29

5.2.9

Still pipes .................................................................................................. 29

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

6 THE RADAR TANK GAUGE ON THE GAUGE SOCKET ............................ 31


6.1
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 31
6.2
The radar tank gauge GLA-300 ............................................................................ 31
6.3
The Radar Tank Gauge on Gauge Sockets ........................................................... 32
6.3.1

The RTG mounted on a 200 mm Gauge Socket .................................... 32

6.3.2

The RTG mounted on a 500 mm Gauge Socket (optional) ................... 33

6.3.3

Optional Manual sounding plug ............................................................... 33

6.3.4

Radar house with variant nipples ............................................................. 33

6.3.5

RTG still pipe solution for slop tank ........................................................ 34

6.3.6

RTG cables installed into cable protection pipes ..................................... 38

6.3.7

RTG installation with flexible hose on cable ........................................... 39

6.3.8

Connection of optional jet nozzle ............................................................. 39

6.3.9

Cleaning nozzle on stand pipe installation ............................................... 41

6.3.10

Installation of pipe adapter for 4.0 pipes ................................................. 42

7 CONNECTION OF OTHER SENSORS ............................................................. 44


7.1
General.................................................................................................................. 44
7.2
Atmospheric pressure transmitter or draft pressure transmitters .......................... 44
8 CABLING ............................................................................................................... 45
8.1
General.................................................................................................................. 45
8.2
Cable specifications .............................................................................................. 45
8.3
Connections overview ....................................................................................... 46
9 INSTALLATION OF THE GLA-300 RADAR TANK GAUGE ...................... 47
9.1
Radar Tank Gauge installation on gauge socket .................................................. 47
9.2
Radar Tanks Gauge on angular gauge socket ....................................................... 48
9.3
Physical description of Gauge Socket for Radar Tank Gauge ............................. 48
9.3.1
Mounting and welding of Gauge Socket for Radar Tank Gauge ............. 49
9.4
Radar Tank Gauge dimensions ............................................................................. 53
9.5
Installation of the Radar Tank Gauge ................................................................... 54

10
10.1

9.5.1

Installation of Radar Tank Gauge............................................................. 54

9.5.2

Installation description ............................................................................. 56

9.5.3

Cable entry and connection ...................................................................... 56

INSTALLATION OF THE GC-300 CARGO TEMPERATURE UNIT ...... 60


System layout of GC-300 tank installation .......................................................... 61

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

10.2

Physical description of separate parts ................................................................... 61


10.2.1

GC-300 Cargo Temperature Unit for maximum 3 temperature sensors .. 61

10.2.2

UP-1052 adapter ....................................................................................... 63

10.2.3 MN1535 temperature sensor .................................................................... 64


10.3 Installation of GC-300 on UP-1052/353167 adapter............................................ 65
10.4 Installation of GC-300 on a FRAMO Tank Pump installation............................. 67
10.5 Installation of MN1535 temperature sensors........................................................ 68
10.6 Connection of MN1535 temperature sensors ....................................................... 70
10.7 GC-300 installation with flexible hose ................................................................. 71
10.8 GC-300 cable preparation..................................................................................... 72
11
APPENDIX 1 ...................................................................................................... 74
Extract of Standards 60533 0 1 EC:1999(E) Measures to achieve EMC ................. 74

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

ABBREVIATIONS

CG:

Centre of gravity of the tank.

CL:

Centre Line.

CTU:

Cargo Temperature Unit.

GC-300:

Cargo Temperature Unit (CTU).

GL0:

Zero ullage reference point for the radar.

GLA-300:

Radar Tank Gauge (RTG).

GLK-300:

Signal Processing Unit (SPU).

GS:

Gauge Socket.

Hb:

Height of the tank.

Hr:

Ullage reference.

La:

Longitudinal distance to CG.

Lb:

Longitudinal distance to MP.

Lr:

Level reference.

MP:

Manual point (also called the manual dip point).

RTG:

Radar Tank Gauge.

SPU:

Signal Processing Unit.

Ta:

Transversal distance to CG.

Tb:

Transversal distance to MP.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 About the manual
The intention with this manual is to provide necessary
information for planning and installation of the GL-300 Tank
Monitoring, for oil, product and chemical tankers.
The manual is meant to give the reader a good understanding of
important matters in connection with engineering prior to the
installation as well as direct installation instructions.
GL-300 request Information sheet [6] must be filled in and
returned to Kongsberg Maritime. The number of pages you will
need to complete and return to Kongsberg Maritime will depend
on the actual installation and configuration of the system.
For further information on system functions, refer to the Product
Description, for K-Gauge CLS Tank Monitoring [1]. For
inquires and technical assistance, please contact Kongsberg
Maritime, Trondheim, Norway.

1.2 The reader


This manual is meant for designers and technical personnel at
shipyards or companies who are responsible for the installation
of GL-300 Tank Monitoring.

1.3 Purpose
The installation manual gives guidelines to location and
describes how to do the mechanical and electrical installation of
the GLA-300 Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) and the GC-300 Cargo
Temperature Unit (CTU) on open deck for oil, product and
chemical tankers.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

1.4 Reference documentation


In addition to this manual, the documentation for KONGSBERG
Tank Monitoring consists mainly of the following manuals:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]

Product Description, K-Gauge CLS


Users Manual, K-Chief500
Users Manual, GL-300
Picture installation guide GL-300
Commissioning Manual GL-300
GL-300 Request Information Sheet

P-KG_GL300/BE
P-KGCLS-GL300/FE
P-GL300/FE
P-GL300/DM
P-GL300/EE
P-GL300REQINF

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

2 ABOUT TANK MONITORING


2.1 KONGSBERG Tank Monitoring
GL-300 Tank Monitoring uses well established radar principles
to provide accurate level measurements. An inert gas pressure
transmitter is integrated in the Radar Tank Gauge, which also
acts as a connection box for the Cargo Temperature Unit. The
CTU shares the communication cable with the RTG. Advanced
signal processing ensures accuracy and reliability.
GL-300 Tank Monitoring mainly consists of:
The Radar Tank Gauge GLA-300 (RTG).
The Cargo Temperature Unit GC-300 (CTU).
The Signal Processing Unit GLK-300 (SPU).
Each tank is equipped with one RTG and one CTU in hazardous
area connected to the SPU in safe area. GL-300 Tank
Monitoring consists of up to 60 SPUs.
The RTG
GLA-300/P

The Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) consists


of an offset parabolic antenna with a 24
GHz microwave transmitter/receiver and
interface to the SPU. The RTG is fitted to
a Gauge Socket and mounted on top of
the tank, thus leaving no parts of the
system in physical contact with the tank
content.
An inert gas pressure transmitter is
integrated in the RTG.

The RTG
GLA-300/H

A variant of the Radar Tank Gauge


(RTG), GLA-300/H horn antenna is
available. This is used for measurement
in clean solutions, and when a still pipe is
required to avoid obstructions in the tank.
The horn antenna is available with a 24
GHz or a 10 GHz microwave unit.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

The CTU
GC-300

The Cargo Temperature Unit (CTU)


consists of a transmitter that can interface
up to three PT-1000 temperature sensors
MN1535. This unit is connected to the
RTG and uses the same cable as the RTG
between hazardous and safe area.

The SPU
GLK-300

The Signal Processing Unit located in the


system cabinet, consists of the following:
Zener barriers, providing power to
the RTG, digital interface handling
measuring signal from the RTG and
HART communication for inert gas
pressure and cargo temperature
signals.
Dual high speed Ethernet
communication to the Remote
Operator Station (ROS).

10

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

GL-300 topology (example with 14 cargo tanks)


11

2.2 Topology diagram for GL-300 Tank Monitoring

Figure 1.
P-GL300/DE Rev. E

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

2.3 Applications
GL-300 Tank Monitoring is primarily intended to measure the
ullage, inert gas pressure and temperature in tanks onboard
ships, offshore and in industry. The standard version can
measure on most liquid, e.g. petroleum products, acids, solvents
etc. up to a distance of 50 metres. The measurements can be
made under extreme environmental conditions with respect to
temperature, pressure and humidity.

12

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

3 STORAGE, TRANSPORTATION AND


UNPACKING
3.1 Storage
The equipment must be stored in a dry place before installation.
Note

To avoid any damage caused by non-proper storing, the


requirements must be followed. The guarantee will otherwise
not be valid!

3.2 Transportation
Heavy equipment should always be transported to the place
where they shall be mounted in their original transport packages,
in order to protect it from damage during transportation. This
concerns specially the use of trucks and cranes.
Note

If any damage rises because of failure in taking these


precautions, the guarantee will not be valid!

3.3 Unpacking, dismantling


When unpacking the equipment, please observe any unpacking
instructions printed on the boxes. Special precautions must be
taken to avoid any damage to the equipment by means of tools
and unpacking equipment.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

13

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

4 PROJECTING AND SYSTEM DELIVERY


4.1 Introduction
All information that is required by Kongsberg Maritime must be
supplied in due time according to the project schedule. It is
important that the "Requested Information pages [6], are filled
in properly and returned to Kongsberg Maritime within the
given deadline.
Note

Drawings showing the shipyards proposed positioning and


drawings showing any obstacle that might affect the radar beam
must be sent to Kongsberg Maritime for review in due time
before installation of Gauge Sockets (preferably when the
system is ordered), latest 120 days before installation.

4.2 Projecting schedule


To ensure an efficient work schedule of the planning,
installation and commissioning of the system, the following
guidelines apply:

14

Order confirmation will be sent to customer.

Based on Purchase Order and specification, approval


documentation will be sent to the customer.

Comments to approval documentation and Requested


Information Pages are to be returned to Kongsberg
Maritime at least 120 days weeks before delivery.

The system will be manufactured, tested and delivered


together with documentation.

The customer will carry out all installations according to


the documentation.

Customer send request to Kongsberg Maritime for a


service engineer at least two (2) weeks before
commissioning.

Kongsberg Maritime carries out the final inspection and


commissioning.

System handover.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

5 LOCATION OF THE RADAR TANK GAUGE


5.1 Introduction
For the installation to retain optimal accuracy it is important that
the free space requirements are fulfilled. Obstacles in the tank
may affect the measuring accuracy.
Note

It is important to choose an optimum position and orientation of


the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) and Gauge Socket (GS) to keep
the interference echo (from obstacles) as low as possible.

5.1.1 Locating the Radar Tank Gauge


In order to minimize the margin of error from trim and list
corrections, it is recommended to locate the Radar Tank Gauge
(RTG) as close to the tank centre as possible. By locating the
RTG close to the tank centre on deck, hence close to centre of
gravity, the influence of trim and list is at its minimum.
Cargo inlet and cargo pump will in different situations disturb
the cargo surface, hence reduce the accuracy of the RTG.

5.1.2 Reflections from obstacles


Obstacles in or very close to the antenna cone will reduce the
accuracy in the vicinity of the obstructions. The influence of the
obstruction will depend on the nature of the obstruction.
Transverse beams, corner reflectors, and pipes give strong
echoes. Means should be taken to reduce the influence of the
obstructions in order to retain the accuracy of the RTG.
Alternatively the obstructions have to be at adequate distance to
the RTG's centre line (CL) in order to remove or reduce the
influence of them.
It is possible to handle several obstructions in software, but the
accuracy will be reduced in the vicinity of these obstructions.
Note

Exceptions from the free space requirements have to be


approved by Kongsberg Maritime before continuing the
planning. Contact Kongsberg Maritime if there are
uncertainties.
See chapter Methods to reduce influence of obstructions.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

15

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

5.2 Free-space requirements and methods to


reduce the influence of obstructions
The radar radiates the energy in a beam. Obstructions or liquid
in the beam will reflect energy back.
Obstructions should not be placed within the primary free-space
cone (primary cone) in Figure 2. Most obstructions located
outside this cone will not influence the measurements. However
some obstructions, particularly pipes and corner reflectors, may
potentially influence the measurements even if they are located
outside the primary cone.

Figure 2.

The primary free space cone

GLA-300
Primary free space cone (from CL)

Table 1. Beam-width of the antenna

16

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Note

The free-space requirements and the methods to reduce the


influence of the obstructions are devised in order to retain
FULL accuracy in the measuring range of the RTG. If the
recommendations are not followed the accuracy will be reduced
in the vicinity of the obstruction. If this is acceptable it is
possible to relax the demands and still retain the stability of the
readings. The system software has incorporated the possibility
to handle one or more obstructions.

5.2.1 Methods to reduce the influence of


obstructions
The following methods can reduce the influence of the
obstructions:
1

Locate the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) where no obstacles


affect the radar beam.

Deflection plates can be welded on top of the longitudinal


frames in the primary cone.

Deflection plates on the obstructions in, or in the vicinity,


of the primary cone

In case there is doubt whether the best available RTG


location is satisfactory for the measurement, shipyard
should inquire KM to check location by real
measurements. In this process, KM will check different
orientations of the RTG (sometimes rotating the RTG can
be enough to reduce the effect of the obstructions to an
acceptable level).

In cases where the above mentioned measures are not


sufficient, measurements must be done through still-pipes.

Some particular obstructions will be shown and measures given


in order to reduce the influence of the obstructions.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

17

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

5.2.2 Corner reflectors


The reflecting structure which causes the strongest reflections is
the "corner reflector". These reflectors reflect all energy
illuminating the corner area back to the radar. The corner
reflector can potentially influence the readings even when they
are outside the primary cone. The influence of the corner
reflector decreases as a function of the distance from the
primary cone. In Table 2 the recommended distance needed for
a total cancellation of the corner reflection is given. At this
distance the full accuracy of the RTG will be retained without
mounting deflection plates. If reduced accuracy can be tolerated
in the vicinity of corner reflection, the influence of it can be
handled in software.
When localizing the sensor on the tank, care should be taken to
avoid reflections from structure which may act as corner
reflectors.

Recommended
angle to corner
reflector without
deflection plates

CL

Figure 3.

18

Corner reflector

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

GLA-300
Recommended angle to corner
reflector without deflection plates

10

Table 2. Minimum angle to corner reflector without deflection


plates
Note

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

The influence of the corner reflector can be reduced by


mounting deflection plates. If reduced accuracy can be tolerated
in the vicinity of corner reflection it can also be handled in
software.

19

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

5.2.3 Longitudinal frames in the primary


cone
Deflection plates have to be welded to the longitudinal or
transverse beams located in the primary cone. These plates
should have an angle of 15 to 25. See illustration in Figure 4.

Figure 4.

Longitudinal frames with deflection plates in the


antenna zone

Deflection plates direct the reflected signal away from the


antenna. Usually, it is sufficient to weld plates only to the two
beams located closest to the antenna axis (on both sides of the
CL). See Figure 5 for a close-up view of the mounted deflection
plates.

The deflection plates must be big enough to cover the


obstruction within the radar cone.

The deflection plates must be mounted with an angle


between 15 and 25 .

20

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

The material must be suitable metal (subject to class


approval).

Deflection plates
15 to 25

Figure 5.

Close-up view of mounted deflection plates

5.2.4 Radar Tank Gauge close to bulkhead


The tank wall or bulkhead will also influence the reflected
signal if it is localized inside the antenna cone, see Figure 6.
Mounting the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) close to the wall will
lead to inaccuracies in the measurements.

12,0

Figure 6.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Free space requirements are not fulfilled

21

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

A
CL

Figure 7.

Distance between Radar Tank Gauge centre line


and tank wall/bulkhead

The minimum required distance A between the tank wall and the
Radar Tank Gauge centre line is given in Table 3.
Height of tank, Hb (m)

Minimum distance A (m)

< 10

0.7

< 20

1.4

< 30

2.1

< 40

2.8

> 40

3.5

Table 3. Distance A in connection with height of tank

22

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Pipes in the tank


Pipes will represent a strongly reflecting radar target. Given the
nature of the pipe it will potentially influence the readings when
it is outside the primary cone. The influence of the pipe
decreases as a function of the distance from the primary cone. In
Figure 8 the recommended angle from CL is given. At the
recommended angle the full accuracy of the RTG will be
retained without mounting deflection plates.

Figure 8.

Precautions to be taken when installing Radar Tank


Gauge in cargo tanks with pipes

GLA-300
Recommended angle to pipe without

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

23

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

deflection plates
Table 4. Angle to pipe without mounting deflection plates
Note

Pipes should not be located inside the primary cone.


Particularly large pipes since this, additionally, might lead to
blocking of the signal. Smaller pipes can meanwhile be covered
with deflection plates in order to reduce their influence. See
Figure 9.

Figure 9.

Note

24

Pipes should not be routed inside the antenna zone

The influence of the pipe can be reduced by mounting deflection


plates. If reduced accuracy can be tolerated in the vicinity of
pipe, it is also possible to handle the obstruction in software.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Optimal Radar Tank Gauge positioning is shown in Figure 10.

Recommended
angle to pipe, see
Figure 8

Figure 10. Radar Tank Gauge free-space requirement is


fulfilled

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

25

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

5.2.5 Platforms, staircases and horizontal


girders
As well as for other obstacles the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG)
should be located away from platforms, ladders and staircases
and horizontal girders which can disturb the beam. See Figure
11. In unavoidable cases deflection plates or still-pipes must be
mounted. Figure 12 illustrates a situation where the free-space
requirement is not fulfilled.

12,0

Figure 11.

26

Obstacles like ladders have to be avoided in the


primary cone

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Figure 12.

Free space requirement for Radar Tank Gauge is


not fulfilled

5.2.6 Heating coils in antenna zone


Heating coils, which are located 5 to 15 cm above the bottom,
should be routed outside the primary cone as in Figure 13.

Figure 13.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Heating coils avoided in the antenna zone

27

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

5.2.7 Cargo inlet


To avoid the radar beam being disturbed by the cargo inlet the
Radar Tank Gauge should be located in proper distance away
from the inlet pipe to avoid the turbulent cargo surface in the
tank. Figure 14 illustrates this. The distance to the inlet should
at least be the primary cone.

Figure 14. Radar Tank Gauge in proper distance from cargo


inlet pipe
The minimum required distance B between the cargo inlet and
the Radar Tank Gauge centre line is given in Table 5.
Height of tank, Hb (m)

Minimum distance B (m)

< 10

1.7

< 20

2.4

< 30

3.1

< 40

3.8

> 40

4.5

Table 5. Distance B in connection with height of tank

28

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

5.2.8 Inert gas inlet


It is important that the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) is not mounted
straight in front of or too close to the inert gas inlet in a tank.
The distance between the sensor and the inlet should not be less
than four (4) metres. If not, condensation of carbon and dirt
from the inert gas may deposit on the radar antenna, which may
lead to instable and inaccurate readings. See Figure 15 for
location of RTG and inert gas inlet pipe.
Min. 4 m

Inert inlet

Figure 15. Inert gas inlet at minimum distance 4 metres from


RTG

5.2.9 Still pipes


When there are too many obstructions which cannot be avoided
or be covered with deflections plates, the radar measurements
have to be done through a still pipe, see Figure 16.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

29

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Figure 16. Installation of still-pipe when free-space


requirements are not possible to fulfil

30

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

6 THE RADAR TANK GAUGE ON THE GAUGE


SOCKET
6.1 Introduction
The Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) for the GL-300 series is mounted
onto a Gauge Socket (GS) on deck. The GS will normally be
shipyard supply; however it may optionally be delivered by
Kongsberg Maritime. The Gauge Socket can be made in several
sizes, 200 mm as standard and minimum diameter. The only
fixed reference parameter is the dimensions for the mounting
bolts underneath the RTG and the minimum diameter. The RTG
units are mounted on top of the tank, leaving no part of the
system in physical contact with the tank content. Only a small
hole in the tank top/deck of 223 mm is required for the
standard GS.
Note

The RTG must not be mounted on the Gauge Socket before all
internal coating of the actual tank has been completed.

6.2 The radar tank gauge GLA-300


The Radar Tank Gauge GLA-300 has a parabolic offset antenna
intended for use on most tankers; crude oil, product and
chemical tankers included. For clean solution a horn variant may
be preferred. The RTG is shown in Figure 17.

Figure 17. The GLA-300 Radar Tank Gauge

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

31

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

6.3 The Radar Tank Gauge on Gauge Sockets


The standard Gauge Socket has an inner diameter of 200 mm
and has a length of 500 mm. Both the diameter and the length of
the GS can be increased. The flange on the socket must fit the
flange on the radar. See figure 19 as an exaple. The maximum
length depends on the diameter and the position of the antenna
relative the centre line of the GS. At 200 mm the maximum
length is 800 mm. At larger diameters, lengths above 800 mm
are possible. Contact Kongsberg Maritime if this is required.

6.3.1 The RTG mounted on a 200 mm


Gauge Socket
The Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) is most often mounted on an
200 mm Gauge Socket (GS) as shown in Figure 18.
Angular adapter is also available. For more detail see chapter 9.

Radar Tank
Gauge unit
housing

Inspection
hatch with
optional
cleaning
nozzle

Gauge
Socket
(shipyard
supply)

Figure 18. The Radar Tank Gauge mounted on a 200 mm


gauge socket

32

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

6.3.2 The RTG mounted on a 500 mm


Gauge Socket (optional)
The Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) can be mounted on a larger
Gauge Socket (GS) than 200 mm. A RTG on an 500 mm
socket is shown in Figure 19. The Gauge Socket is normally
shipyard supply.

Figure 19. 500 mm Gauge Socket with sounding plug

6.3.3 Optional Manual sounding plug


The manual sounding plug is only possible to incorporate when
applying the Radar Tank Gauge to a Gauge Socket which is
larger than 200 mm, as in Figure 19.

6.3.4 Radar house with variant nipples


The radar housing is available with several different cable
solutions.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

33

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

This makes it possible to use cables with outer diameter from


12.5 mm to 23.0 mm for the communication cable to CCR, and
8.0 mm to 15.0 mm for the cable to the temperature sensors. For
CCR cable with other dimensions than the standard 12.5 mm
20.5 mm special adaptors will be needed. Adaptors are also
needed when using protection hoses.
The following variants are available:
1. GLA-300 house with different dimension cable
outlets. One large cable outlet for CCR communication
cable (diameters from 12.5 mm up to 23.0 mm) and one
smaller cable outlet for temperature cable (from 8 mm up
to 15.0 mm). The positions for the CCR cable and the
temperature cable will not be interchangeable on these
housings.
2. GLA-300 house with same dimensions cable outlet.
Two large dimension cable outlets makes it possible to
choose which cable outlet that are to be used for CCR
cable and which one to use for temperature cable. Cable
dimensions allowed are the same (CCR communication
cable with diameters from 12.5 mm up to 23.0 mm and
temperature cable from 8 mm up to 15.0 mm).
The GLA-300 house is ordered with cable gland to match
project delivery specification. However it is possible to
interchange the cable glands if necessary. Thread lock
(Locktite 222 or equivalent) must be applied if the cable
glands or adaptors is loosened or removed from their
original position during installation.

6.3.5 RTG still pipe solution for slop tank


The GL-300 Horn antenna mounted on a standpipe are to be
used on slop tanks when a free radar beam is impossible to
obtain due to tank obstructions.

34

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Figure 20. GLA-300 Horn antenna

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

35

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

GLA-300 Horn antenna mounted on 3.5 flanged standpipe.

Figure 21. GLA-300/HS mounted on 3.5 flanged standpipe

36

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

GLA-300 Horn antenna mounted on 3.5 welded standpipe.

Figure 22. GLA-300/HS mounted on 3.5 welded standpipe

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

37

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

6.3.6 RTG cables installed into cable


protection pipes

Figure 23. RTG cables installed into cable protection pipes

38

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

6.3.7 RTG installation with flexible hose


on cable
An option is that the cables can be installed with protective
flexible hose. Illustrations for installation of flexible hose.

Mount the flex hose adapter, but dont


fasten it
Fasten the cable gland, and finalize with
fasten the flex hose adapter.

Fasten the flexible hose and make sure


the drain hole is positioned downwards

GLA-300 flexible hose installed on both


glands.

Figure 24. GLA-300 with protection hose

6.3.8 Connection of optional jet nozzle


A jet nozzle for cleaning of the RTGs antenna can be connected
to the inspection hatch as an option. A jet nozzle may be
necessary on certain vessels, e.g. ice class and chemical ships
(ref. classification societies). The nozzle is supplied with a rapid
coupling for easy connection of pump equipment.
P-GL300/DE Rev. E

39

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

The nozzle must be fitted so that it points towards the radar


antenna.
Note

Only cleaning agents not harming the cargo must be used.

Figure 25. Cleaning equipment with jet nozzle

40

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

6.3.9 Cleaning nozzle on stand pipe installation

Figure 26. Cleaning equipment with jet nozzle

For cleaning the surface of the horn antenna inside the socket
and still pipe, a solution with a PTFE hose connected from the
cleaning nozzle via a metal tube is designed.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

41

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Figure 27. Still pipe with cleaning equipment with jet nozzle

6.3.10 Installation of pipe adapter for 4.0 pipes

The GLA-300 horn antenna is developed to fit a 3.5 pipe


solution. To be able to measure on a 4.0 pipe, an adapter is
developed to be mounted between the radar and the pipe.

42

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Figure 28. Still pipe adapter from 3.5 to 4.0 pipe

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

43

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

7 CONNECTION OF OTHER SENSORS


7.1 General
As a standard, up to three temperature sensors MN1535 and one
inert gas pressure transmitter are connected to the Signal
Processing Unit (SPU). The transmitters communicate by
HART protocol on the same cable, routed from the Cargo
Temperature Unit via the Radar Tank Gauge to the Signal
Processing Unit.
When FRAMO pumps are used, the temperature sensors
MN1535 are mounted in an existing pipe combined with the
cargo pump.

7.2 Atmospheric pressure transmitter or draft


pressure transmitters
Other measurement points (draft, atmospheric pressure, service
level, ballast level etc) can be connected to DPUs in the cargo
cabinet. See Figure 1.

44

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

8 CABLING
8.1 General
This chapter is meant to give brief information of cable
installation and requirement and specifications from class
societies and other authorities. For further details on regulations
and standards, see Appendix 1.

8.2 Cable specifications


The Radar Tank Gauge and the Cargo Temperature Unit are as
standard connected to the Signal Processing Unit (SPU) by a 3twisted pair overall screened cable.
The cable has the following specifications:
Minimum conductor cross-sectional area:

0.5 mm.

Minimum outer diameter:

12.5 mm.

Maximum outer diameter:

23.0 mm.

Maximum length (see note *):


Conductor cross-sectional area 0.5 mm:

100 m.

Conductor cross-sectional area 0.75 mm:

150 m.

Conductor cross-sectional area 1.0 mm:

200 m.

Conductor cross-sectional area 1.5 mm:

300 m.

Maximum cable loop resistance:


Maximum Lo/Ro:

8 ohm.
17 H/ohm.

The cable connecting GLA-300 and GC-300 on deck is an


extension of the HART pair between GLA-300 and GLK-300.
This cable only needs to be 1-twisted pair overall screened, and
can be up to 70 m long in addition to the maximum lengths
mentioned above for the main cable. Remark that the same
minimum conductor cross-sectional area applies. The outer
diameter for the cable between the GLA-300 and GC-300 can be
in the range from 8 to 15 mm.
To double the maximum length between GLK-300 and GLA300 it is possible to use a 4-twisted pair overall screened cable
(instead of 3-twisted pair) and use two of those pairs for power
as indicated in the connection drawing in figure 39.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

45

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Note

*) Cable type and installation is subject to classification society


approval. Ref. IEC publication 60092-602

8.3 Connections overview


Table 5 shows the connection of the cable between the Radar
Tank Gauge (RTG) and the Signal Processing Unit (SPU).
Table 6 shows the connection of the cable between the Cargo
Temperature Unit (CTU) and the Radar Tank Gauge.
The installation of the RTG and the CTU is to be referred to as
instrumentation installation, and is intrinsically safe. When cable
is routed the guidance given in IEC 60533 shall be applied,
C.2.4 state: cables of different categories which run parallel for
a distance exceeding 1 m should be installed with an
intermediate free space of 10 cm minimum between the different
categories of cable.

Signal Cable pair Cable core


HART+
HART485 A485 B+
0 volt
+ 10 volt

1
1
2
2
3
3

1
2
3
4
5
6

Terminal
Terminal
block (RTG) block (SPU)
1
2
3
4
5
6

X4.5 (X1.5)
X4.6 (X1.6)
X3.6 (X2.6)
X3.5 (X2.5)
X4.4 (X1.4)
X3.4 (X2.4)

Table 6. Cable connection in Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) and Signal Processing Unit
(SPU). Figures in brackets for the SPU are alternative connections.
Signal Cable pair Cable core
HART+
HART-

1
1

1
2

Terminal
Terminal
block (RTG) block (CTU)
1
2

1
2

Table 7. Cable connection in Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) and Cargo Temperature Unit
(CTU)
Note

46

You will find the complete cabling standards (Standards 60533


0 1 EC:1999(E)) in Appendix 1.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

9 INSTALLATION OF THE GLA-300 RADAR


TANK GAUGE
9.1 Radar Tank Gauge installation on gauge
socket

The Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) is mounted onto a Gauge Socket


(GS). In this chapter you can find detailed installation
instructions for the mechanical mounting as well as the electrical
installation.

Figure 29. Radar Tank Gauge GLH-300/P on 200 mm gauge


socket

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

47

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

9.2 Radar Tanks Gauge on angular gauge socket


The RTG adapts to an angular adapter with inner diameter of
200 mm. The angular adapter shall be welded to the top of the
tank, preferably as close to the centre of gravity of the tank as
possible.

Figure 30. Radar Tank Gauge GLA-300/H on 200 mm angular gauge socket

9.3 Physical description of Gauge Socket for


Radar Tank Gauge
The Gauge Sockets (GS) physical dimensions are shown in
Figure 31. All dimensions are in millimetre (mm).

48

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Figure 31. Gauge Socket sized 200 mm (normally yard supply). Hatch flange type
(DIN, JIS, ANSI) may vary according to yard/customer specification Cable rails
are optional dependant on installation method..

9.3.1 Mounting and welding of Gauge


Socket for Radar Tank Gauge
For mounting and welding the GS to deck/tank top, please
follow the instructions in the following Figures; 32 to 35.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

49

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Cut a hole 223 in the tank


top.
Based on drawing GL-1340

Figure 32. Mounting and welding procedure of the Gauge Socket (I)
Place the Gauge Socket
centrally
located in the hole with an
insert
of 50 mm (see Figure34).
When the ship is even keel,
adjust tank socket flange to
be horizontal within +/-1
degree in longitudinal (trim)
and transversal (list)
direction.
Spot weld 4 spots, 2
longitudinal
and 2 transversal, to secure
alignment before completing
welding.
Note! : The direction of the
E plane, and consequently
the cleaning hatch, may vary
depending on space on deck
and/or tank interior
conditions, and will therefore
be subject to individual
advice.
See also Figure 34 and 35.

E-plane indication in
Electromagnetic plane.

figure

is

illustration

of

the

antenna

Figure 33. Mounting and welding procedure of the Gauge Socket (II)

50

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Tank socket welding must be done according to drawing number US-644.


Figure 34. Mounting and welding procedure of the Gauge Socket (III)

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

51

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Based on drawing US-644.

Figure 35. Mounting and welding procedure of the Gauge Socket (IV)

52

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

9.4 Radar Tank Gauge dimensions


Figure 36 shows the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) dimensions in millimetre.

Based on drawing GL-2459.

Figure 36. Radar Tank Gauge physical dimensions

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

53

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

9.5 Installation of the Radar Tank Gauge


9.5.1 Installation of Radar Tank Gauge
1. Radar Tank Gauge
GLA-300
2. Tank Socket
3. Flat gasket (yard
supply). May differ in
appearance
4. Main cable
5. Cargo Temperature
GC-300 Cable
6. M20x55 Hex Head Bolt
7. M20 Hex Nut
8. M20 Lock Washer
9. Serrated Lock Washer

Figure 37. Main parts of Radar Tank Gauge GLA-300/P

54

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

1. Radar Tank
Gauge GLA-300
2. Tank Socket
3. Flat gasket (yard
supply). May
differ in
appearance
4. M20x55 Hex
Head Bolt
5. M20 Lock
Washer
6. M20x55 Hex
Nut
7. Serrated Lock
Washer

Figure 38. Main parts of Radar Tank Gauge GLA-300/H

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

55

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Note

The Radar Tank Gauge unit shall not be mounted onto the
Gauge Socket before tank painting / coating work is finished.

9.5.2 Installation description


Radar Tank Gauge unit preparation
1. Put the flat gasket on top of the Gauge Socket (standard JIS
5K200 gasket which must be cargo resistant).
2. Place the RTG on top with cable glands directed as shown in
Figure 37 (or complete RTG unit rotated 180 degrees).(GL2630)
3. Apply bolt lubrication, Antiseize on the bolt threads before
fastening the bolts loosely in a diagonal clockwise pattern.
Repeat pattern with an increasing stud torque up to 150 Nm.

9.5.3 Cable entry and connection


See External connection drawing Figure 39, Figure 40 and
description below for main cable entering into the Radar Tank
Gauge (RTG).
1. Unscrew the nuts on the RTG locking ring and remove the
locking ring.
2. Lift off the RTG top cover to get access to the inside. While
being removed from the RTG, handle the cover carefully to
prevent dirt or contamination to access the cover gasket, the
cover rim, or the inside.
3. Prepare cables according to Figure 40.
4. Connect the main cable to electronic unit GLH-300
according to connection diagram in Figure 39 (GL-2641).
5. After connection of cables, put the cover back on the RTG.
Ensure that all parts are clean. Special attention must be
shown to the gasket and gasket mating surfaces, ref. item 2.

56

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Figure 39. Electrical connection of GLA-300

Prepare the cable end and enter the cable through the cable gland according to
instructions below. Remember that the acceptable range of the cable outer diameter is
from 12.5 mm to 20.5 mm. (Up to 23.0 mm with an adapter installed)

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

57

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Figure 40. GLA-300 main cable mounting method. The connection between GLA300 and GC-300 shall be carried out in the same manner, see chapter 10 (this
is the smallest gland on the GLA-300 unit).

58

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Gland sizes/torque
Thread (M)

Range(mm)

Torque(NM)

M20x1.5

8-15

M25x1.5

12.5-20

M32x1.5

17-25.5

The specified torques are maximum values for compression


nuts. These nuts should be tightened until the torque specified in
the table is reached OR until the sealing insert protrudes slightly
over the compression nut. Intermediate connecting pieces (lower
part of cable gland) should be tightened with the respective
thread size and protected against inadvertent loosening.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

59

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

10 INSTALLATION OF THE GC-300 CARGO


TEMPERATURE UNIT
The Cargo Temperature Unit can either be mounted together
with the cargo pump or on open deck. An overview of the Cargo
Temperature Unit open deck installation is shown below in
Figure 41.
GC-300/- Cargo
Temperature Unit
Cable pipe

Adapter
Tank top

Tank wall

To reduce the response time, it is


recommended to fill the
protection pipe with a liquid. The
measurement then will also be
more concentrated at the
measuring point. Different types
of liquids can be used, but it is
recommended to use transformer
oil, which can be delivered by
most oil companies.
The liquid/oil must:
Suit the cargo temperature.
Not corrode the sensors
and pipes.
Not, in case of leaks, be
harmful to the cargo.
Not freeze or crystallize in
the temperature range.

Support

Protection pipe

Figure 41. Overview of the GC-300 installation

60

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

10.1 System layout of GC-300 tank installation

Based on drawing: GC-221

All dimensions in millimetre (mm).

Figure 42. System layout GC-300 installation

10.2 Physical description of separate parts


10.2.1 GC-300 Cargo Temperature Unit
for maximum 3 temperature sensors

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

61

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

All dimensions in millimetre (mm).

Based on drawing.: GC-218

Figure 43. The GC-300 Cargo Temperature Unit

62

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

10.2.2 UP-1052 adapter

Based on drawing.: UP-1052

All dimensions in millimetre (mm).

Figure 44. The UP-1052 adapter

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

63

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

10.2.3 MN1535 temperature sensor

Based on drawing.: MN-1535

All dimensions in millimetre (mm).

Figure 45. The MN1535 temperature sensor (Pt100 & Pt1000 applicable for GL300)

64

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

10.3 Installation of GC-300 on UP-1052/353167


adapter
1: Inspect that the adapter
[7] and the sensor
protection pipe beneath
are made and
assembled/welded and
leakage tested acording
to drawing MN-4511.
2: Unscrew tension ring
nut [1] with a 10 mm
wrench, and remove
tension ring. Then remove
cover [2] with gasket and
electronics and put them
on a safe dry place.
3: Make sure that the
adapter [7] gasket area is
clean. Place the gasket
[6] on top of adapter [7].
Then place the GC-300
[5] correctly oriented on
top of the gasket.
4: Fasten GC-300 by
using the 4 unbraco bolts
and washers placed
inside the box. 6 mm
unbraco key.
Torque: 40 Nm.
5: If wiring occur later, put
back the cover with
electronics and gasket [2]
and fasten the tension
Based on drawing: GC-223_1

Figure 46. Installation of GC-300 on UP-1052 adapter

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

65

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Figure 47. Installation of GC-300 on UP-1052 / 353167 Adapter and protection


pipe

1
2
3
4
5

66

Protection pipe 30x2 or 34.4x3.38


Pipe suspension
Muff
Adapter
UP-1052 or 353167
Bottom coin

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

10.4 Installation of GC-300 on a FRAMO Tank


Pump installation
1: FRAMO pump [7]
and the temperature
sensor protection pipe
beneath the pump
flange are made and
assembled/welded by
pump supplier.
2: Unscrew tension ring
nut [1] with a 10 mm
wrench, and remove
tension ring. Then
remove cover [2] with
gasket and electronics
and put them on a safe
dry place.
3: Make sure that the
gasket area is clean.
Place the gasket [6] on
top of the corresponding
holes in the FRAMO
flange . Then place the
GC-300 [5] correctly
oriented on top of the
gasket.

2
Based on drawing: GC-222_1

4: Fasten GC-300 by
using the 4 unbraco
bolts [3] and washers
[4] placed inside the
box. 6 mm unbraco key.
Torque: 40 Nm.
5: If wiring occur later,
put back the cover with
electronics and gasket
[2] and fasten the
tension ring.

Figure 48. Installalation og GC-300 on a FRAMO Tank Pump installation

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

67

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

10.5 Installation of MN1535 temperature sensors


1. Unscrew tension ring nut with a 10 mm wrench, and remove tension ring. Then
remove cover with gasket and electronics and put them on a safe dry place
Prepare and install the main temperature cable [1] according to drawing GC-224.
Inspect that the main cable screen is evenly distributed before fastening the screen
clamp [2].
2. Remove the extra blindplug(s) [7]. They are needed when the number of
temperature sensors are less then three.

Based on drawing: GC-223_2

Based on drawing: GC-222_2

Figure 49. Installation of MN1535 temperature sensors (part I) for both open deck
and FRAMO Tank Pump installation

68

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

3. Push the sensor end of the longest temperature sensor MN1535 [3] through the
hole in the GC-300 connection box bottom (Fig. 1), enter the mantle nipple threads [4]
by hand (Fig. 2), push the wires through the installation tool [8] and lower the tool over
the nut [6], ring [5], and mantle nipple [4] (Fig. 3) and fasten the nipple.
Torque: 30 Nm.
4. Then lift the tool until it engages the nut [6] (Fig. 4) and fasten it.
Torque 25 Nm.
Repeat the procedure on the middle sensor MN1535 and upper sensor MN1535.
5. Connect wires according to connection diagram on drawing
GC-223_3

Based on drawing: GC-223_2

Figure 50. Installation of MN1535 temperature sensors (part II) for both open deck
and FRAMO Tank Pump installation

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

69

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

10.6 Connection of MN1535 temperature sensors

X1: Top sensor


X2: Middle sensor
Based on drawing.: GC-223_3

X3: Bottom sensor

Figure 51. Connection of MN1535 temperature sensors

70

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

10.7 GC-300 installation with flexible hose


An option is that the cables can be installed with protective
flexible hose. Illustrations for installation of flexible hose.

Mount the flex hose adapter, but dont


fasten it.

Fasten the cable gland, and finalize with


fasten the flex hose adapter.

Fasten the flexible hose and make sure the


drain hole is positioned downwards

GC-300 complete installed

Figure 52. GC-300 with protection hose

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

71

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

10.8 GC-300 cable preparation

72

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Figure 53. GC-300 cable preparation (I)

Based on drawing.: GC-224

Figure 54. GC-300 cable preparation (II)

Based on drawing.: GC-224

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

73

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

11 APPENDIX 1
Extract of Standards 60533 0 1 EC:1999(E)
Measures to achieve EMC
Annex C
(informative)
Measures to achieve EMC
C.1 Applicability
This annex contains guidelines and recommendations for
organisational
and
technical
measures
to
achieve
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) in ships and in ships'
equipment. These preventive measures concern electric and
electronic equipment and, in special cases, non-electric
equipment.
These guidelines and recommendations have proven successful
in practical application, however, under certain circumstances;
additional measures may become necessary to achieve the
desired level of EMC.
Use of these guidelines and recommendations will help ensure
that the EMC performance achieved for items of equipment will
be maintained in an installation.
C.2 General technical measures
Effective measures to achieve EMC should be taken so that
neither safety of the ship's crew and of the vessel nor the reliable
operation of electric installations shall in any way be
jeopardised.
IEC 60092-101 and IEC 60092-201 should be observed.
EMC measures should equally extend to:

74

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Decoupling the interference path between source and


affected equipment/system; - reduction of the level of
emission at its source; - increasing the immunity to the
disturbance at the affected equipment/system.

The following measures can be applied individually or in


combination:

Screening;

Grounding;

Suitable cable routing, cable separation and cable selection;

Selection of suitable equipment mounting place;

Filtering;

Use of special components (for example over voltage


protectors);

Use of special devices (for example to separate different


potentials);

Organisational measures (for example alternating operation


of devices).

Details can be found in C.2.2, C.2.3, C.2.4 and C.2.5. Other


measures are related to equipment and installations and details
can be found in clause C.3. Organisational measures are
described in clause C.4. Special recommendations or comments
concerning equipment, items or individual installations are
detailed in groups A to F of C.2.1.
The combination of all equipment, items and installations
interconnected for the intended performance of a given function
is called an "integrated system". If certain technical measures for
the integration process need to be taken, or if these measures
have proven recommendable in practical applications, or, again,
exceed those detailed in C.2.1, groups A to F, such measures
have been listed in group G.
C2.1 Equipment and installation groups
Group A: Radio communication and navigation equipment.
Typical properties: operation with radiated signals.
Examples: transmitters and receivers for maritime
radio communication and navigation services and
on-board communication systems.
Group B: Power generation and conversion equipment.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

75

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Typical properties: broadband interference.


Examples: rectifiers, inverters, converters (power
electronics), rotating converters, generators, deck
machinery, domestic equipment, fluorescent lamps,
discharge lamps.
Group C: Equipment operating with pulsed power.
Typical properties: periodical transient interferences
with high energy.
Examples: radar and sonar systems, echo sounders.
Group D: Switchgear and control systems.
Typical properties: transient interferences.
Examples: switchboards, relay-operated control
devices, motor starters, and electric heating systems.
Group E: Intercommunication
and
signal
processing
equipment.
Typical properties: operation with analogue and
digital signals.
Examples: automation system, computers, sensors,
public-address, signalling and alarm systems.
Group F: Non-electrical items and equipment.
Typical properties: generation
broadband interference.
Example: rigging.

of

parasitic

Group G: Integrated systems.


Typical properties: interference resulting from the
simultaneous operation of equipment and
installations from groups A to F.
Example: navigational equipment with sensors in the upper deck
area as well as keel area, integrated propulsion system, cargo
monitoring system with sensors and equipment in different
zones.
C.2.2 Screening
Equipment and devices need to be effectively screened, i.e.:

76

Installation in metallic enclosures;

Use of screened cables, including suitable cable glands,


preferably at the cable entry point of metallic enclosures;

Utilisation of metal bulkheads and decks for screening, and


grounding of cable screens at penetration points where
possible.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

C.2.3 Grounding
All metallic enclosures and metallic equipment items need to be
effectively grounded. The requirements of the equipment
manufacturer should be observed.
The aim of all grounding procedures is to unite the reference
potential of distributed equipment items.
In principle there are two different ways to minimise any
difference in potential of different reference conductors:

Grounding of reference conductors in a star pattern;

Grounding of reference conductors on a ground plane.

In the star-grounding pattern, all reference conductors are


connected to one single point, i.e. the ground point. Only this
single ground point should have a conductor to the ship's
structure. For a ground plane pattern, all reference conductors
should be connected to the ship's structure at the closest possible
point and at as many points as is feasible. The result is a ground
reference plane with the smallest possible ground-loops and
smallest possible inductance.
The following criteria should be used to select the proper
grounding method:

The star pattern should be used for DC and AC up to 10


kHz;

The ground plane pattern should be used for frequencies


above 100 kHz;

Either grounding method is acceptable in the frequency


range between 10 kHz and 100 kHz.

The ground plane pattern is preferred.


All ground connections should have the following properties:

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Low HF impedance;

Smallest possible length (small inductance);

Vibration-resistance of connectors and conductors;

Corrosion resistance;

Access for routine inspection.

77

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

All contact areas must be metallically clean, free from paint or


oxides or other insulating layers. It is recommended that
corrosion protection spray or paste is applied at each contact
point before final assembly. Solid metal strips of minimum
length should be used instead of flexible braided bands. Ground
loops should be kept to a minimum.
In order to avoid interference by undefined bonding all
non-electrical metallic items on the weather deck with a
dimension exceeding 1m (for example rigs) should be connected
to the ship's structure by means of good electrical connection. In
exceptional cases an object may be electrically insulated.
Wherever possible, metallic enclosures of electrical equipment
should be directly screwed or welded to the ship's structure.
Separate ground conductors should be used in cases where a
ground connection cannot be effected by a metallically clean
screwed connection.
The contact between the ground conductor and the equipment or
the ship's structure may be either screwed or welded.
Ground conductors for connection of metal items on the free
deck to the ship's structure should be produced from
corrosion-resistant steel (solid or flexible). Ground conductors
inside the ship will generally be made from copper.
Metallic doors, protective covers, etc. should be connected to
the respective enclosures by means of short, separate and
possibly flexible conductors.
Pieces of cable trays and protective cable piping should have
electrical connections to each other and to the ship's structure at
as many points as possible.
Metallic cable jackets and cable screens should generally be
grounded to the metallic enclosure of the equipment or to the
ship's structure at as many points as is feasible, and at least on
both ends of the cable (exception see C.3.5.3).
For ships with non-metallic structures, all conductively
interconnected metal parts (including ground plate if existing)
will form an artificial ground.
C.2.4 Cable routing

78

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

The installation requirements of the equipment manufacturer,


including cable selection and cable routing, should be adhered
to. Cable separation into categories according to different signal
types, and cable installation with intermediate free spaces should
be used as a major preventive measure.
Basically all cables outside the ship's structure should be metal
sheathed, metal braided or otherwise adequately screened.
Independently of the system they belong to, cables in category 1
up to and including category 4 may be bundled per category.
Single cables or bundles of cables of different categories
running parallel for distances exceeding 1 m, should be installed
with an intermediate free space of 10 cm minimum between the
different categories of cables.
The same requirement should be observed for cables of the same
category but with differing signal levels.
Cables belonging to category 1, 4 and 5 should be affixed to a
metal surface (deck, bulkhead or cable duct). The metal cable
ducts should not be insulated from bulkheads.
Special measures may be necessary between cables of category
3 and 4 (for example protective cable piping). The same applies
to those cases where the minimum cable separation cannot be
implemented.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

79

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Cables for
Radio receiver
signals 2)
TV receiver signals
Video signals
Analogue and
digital signals

Telephone signals
Loudspeaker
signals
Control signals
Alarm signals
Power supply 1)

Table C.1 Signal types and cable categories


Emission/
Cable
Applicable
Level
immunity
Cable type 4)
category
standard
rating
0.1 mV to Extremely
3
Coaxial
IEC 60096-1
500 mV
sensitive

0.1 V to
115 V

Sensitive

IEC 60092-376

10 V to
1000 V

Potentially
disturbing

10 V to
1000 V

Extremely
disturbing

Lighting

High-power
transmission signals
Pulsed high-power
signals 2)
High powered
semi-conductor
converter
Special applications
Fibre optics

Twisted;
single
screened; IEC 60092-374
screened
twisted pairs
IEC 60092-375

Below deck: IEC 60092-350


non-screened; IEC 60092-353
above deck:
twisted,
screened
Coaxial;
screened
power

Special cable

Twisted,
screened

IEC 60092-350
IEC 60092-353

Special

5
-

1) Equipment and auxiliary equipment for radio communication and radio navigation
should be fitted with screened power supply cables.
2) Receiving antenna cables should be installed with double screen cables or coaxial
cables inside protective piping.
3) Cables for radar, sonar equipment and echo sounders should be double screen cables
or coaxial cables inside protective piping.
4) The "filling factor" for cable screens as required by the IEC should be adhered to and
the transfer impedance at 10 MHz as determined by IEC 60096-1 should not exceed 30
mi2/m.

80

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Cable screens should be connected in connection boxes or cable


drawing boxes. Cable screens should not be used as the return
conductor for operating circuits except the outer conductor of
coaxial cable.
Where it is impossible to meet the separation requirements,
cables with high shielding effectiveness should be used, or cable
bundles should be laid in metal pipes or conduits.
The pipes or conduits should have a minimum thickness of 1mm
if not otherwise specified. If a cable runs through a metal pipe or
conduit, further separation with regard to the other categories is
not necessary.
It is recommended to install the cables close to the metallic ship
structure or on metallic cable trays.
It is recommended to ground cable screens circumferentially at
those points where cables penetrate the boundary between the
free deck and the ship's interior. These grounding areas must be
protected against corrosion.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

81

CHAPTER 9

Classification approvals

Type approval cert.

CHAPTER 10

Ex-certificates

Page 1 of 4
PROD 004

[1] EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE


[2] Equipment or Protected System Intended for use
in Potentially explosive atmospheres
Directive 94/9/EC
[3]

EC-Type Examination Certificate Number:

Nemko 09ATEX1132X Issue 1

[4]
[5]
[6]

Equipment or Protective System:


Applicant/ Manufacturer:
Address:

GLA-300. Radar Tank Gauge


Kongsberg Maritime AS
Haakon VIIs gt. 4
N-7005 Trondheim, Norway

[7]

This equipment or protective system and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this
certificate and the documents therein referred to.

[8]

Nemko AS, notified body number 0470 in accordance with Article 9 of Council Directive 94/9/EC of 23 March
1994, certifies that this equipment or protective system has been found to comply with the Essential Health and
Safety requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for
use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to the Directive.
The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report no. 148912

[9]

Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with:
EN 60079-0: 2006, EN 60079-11: 2007 and EN 60079-26 : 2004

[10]

If the sign X is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment or protective system is
subject to special conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate.

[11]

This EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE relates only to the design, examination and tests of the
specified equipment or protective system in accordance to the directive 94/9/EC.
Further requirements of the Directive apply to the manufacturing process and supply of this equipment or
protective system. These are not covered by this certificate.

[12] The marking of the equipment or protective system shall include the following:

II 1G

Ex ia IIC T4 Ta: -45C Ta 85C

Oslo, 2010-05-25

Rolf Hoel
Certification Manager, Ex-products

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

Nemko 09ATEX1132X Issue 1

Date: 2010-05-25

Page 2 of 4

[13] Schedule
[14]
[15]

EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE No

Nemko 09ATEX1132X Issue 1

Description of Equipment or Protective System


The GLA-300/X-YZ Radar Tank Gauge is an intrinsically safe level gauging sensor comprising an integral inert
pressure transmitter, enclosed in a stainless steel housing. It has digital communication (RS-485 and Hart) to
processing equipment in safe area, and shall be connected to power and signal interfaces with compatible safety
parameters.
Type Designation
GLA-300 /X-YZ
X: P = Parabola, H = Horn, HS = Horn Standpipe
Optional for H and HS variants:
Y: 1 = 10 GHz, 2 = 24GHz (operational frequency)
Z: 1 = PTFE, 2 = PEEK (lens material)
Safety Parameters.
Terminals X1. p6, p5 (Power)
Maximum input voltage.
Maximum input current.
Maximum input power.
Maximum internal capacitance.
Maximum internal inductance.

Ui:
Ii:
Pi:
Ci:
Li:

14,3V DC
560 mA
2,1W
347nF
Negligible

Ui:
Ii:
Pi:
Ci:
Li:

28,0V DC
160 mA
0,85W
9,3nF
Negligible

Ui:
Ii:
Pi:
Ci:
Li:

7,0V DC
100mA
0,12W
Negligible
Negligible

Terminals X1. p1, p2 (HART)


Maximum input voltage.
Maximum input current.
Maximum input power.
Maximum internal capacitance.
Maximum internal inductance.
Terminals X1. p3, p4, p5 (RS-485)
Maximum input voltage.
Maximum input current.
Maximum input power.
Maximum internal capacitance.
Maximum internal inductance.

Range of ambient temperature: -45C Ta 85C


Degree of protection: IP66/67 according to EN 60529.
This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

Date: 2010-05-25

Nemko 09ATEX1132X Issue 1


[16]

Page 3 of 4

Report No. 148912

Certificate History and Associated Nemko Reports


Issue Date
Report
Description

0
1

2009-06-23
2010-05-25

119309
148912

Prime Certificate released


Certificate updated with the models GLA-300/H and GLA300/HS

Descriptive Documents
Name/Number

Rev.

GL-2513

Date
(yyyy-mm-dd)
2009-06-04

GL-2539
GL-2458

A
B

2009-05-28
2009-12-08

GL-2459

2010-04-28

GL-2146
GL-2210
GL-2110
GL-2189
GLB-300_9212-462 0.brd
BUILDUP_04LAYER
STANDARD.pdf
PCB_SPEC_GLB-300_9212462 0.pdf
GL-2462
GT-1468
E-2691
E-2697
13-1562-TAB
9212-462.0000
DLT6118
DLT6109
KSLT6118

B
A
A
A
0
-

Title/Description

Sheets
1

2009-05-25
2008-01-23
2008-01-22
2008-01-21
2009-05-28
2001-04-11

Safety Control Drawing and Electrical


connection of GL-300 Tank Monitoring
GLH-300 (GLB-300 Potted)
RTG unit GLA-300 Radar Tank Gauging
system
GLA-300 Tank sensor Radar Tank
Gauging system
Offset Parabola Feed Assembly
Offset Parabola Antenna
Cover for Feed
PTFE TFM Bolt
Glb_300_9212-462 / PCB design
4 LAYER, 1.6mm STANDARD BUILD

2009-06-02

PCB Specifications

A
B
A
C
A
D
E
D

2009-02-09
2009-06-08
2010-02-10
2009-06-03
2006-04-14
2009-05-25
2009-04-20
2009-06-08
2009-04-20

1
3
1
1
1
4
1
1
4

KSLT6109

2009-06-08

PSLT6118

PSLT6109

TFLT6118
TFLT6109
GL-2557

A
A
B

2010-03-17

GL-2566

2010-04-20

GL-2552

2010-04-28

GL-2553

2010-04-28

GLB-300 Schematics
GLB-300 Schematics
Laser tagging for GLA-300
Sticker for GLH-300
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
GLB-300, Bill of materials
FMCW Radar module (24Ghz)
FMCW Radar module (10Ghz)
24-25.5 GHz FMCW RADAR FRONT
END
9.25-10.75 GHz FMCW RADAR FRONT
END
Viktoria, RS3400K/00 24GHz Microwave
Unit for Radar Level Gauging
Marit, RS3400X/00 10GHz Microwave
Unit for Radar Level Gauging
Tillverkningsfreskrift
Tillverkningsfreskrift
GLA-300/HS Radar Tank Gauge for 3.5
Standpipe Installation Drawing
GLA-300/HS Tank Sensor Common Parts
Assembly Drawing
GLA-300/HS-10PEEK Tank sensor for
10Ghz with PEEK lens for 3.5 Standpipe
Assembly Drawing
GLA-300/HS-10PTFE Tank sensor for

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

1
1
1
3
2
1
1
4
1

4
1
1
2
2
1
1
1

Nemko 09ATEX1132X Issue 1

GL-2554

2010-04-28

GL-2555

2010-04-28

GL-2550

2009-06-24

GL-2544

2009-06-17

GL-2547

2009-06-17

[17]

[18]

Date: 2010-05-25

10Ghz with PTFE lens for 3.5 Standpipe


Assembly Drawing
GLA-300/HS-24PEEK Tank sensor for
24GHz with PEEK lens for 3.5 Standpipe
and free space applications
Assembly Drawing
GLA-300/HS-24 PTFE Tank sensor for
24GHz with PTFE lens for 3.5 Standpipe
and free space applications
Assembly Drawing
Lens type GL2550/- for Horn Antenna for
3.5 Standpipe and free space applications
Detail Drawing
Horn Antenna type GL-2544/10-PEEK for
3.5 Standpipe
Weldment Drawing
24GHz Horn Antenna type GL-2547/24PEEK for 3.5 Standpipe and free space
applications
Weldment Drawing

Page 4 of 4

Special Conditions for Safe Use


1.

The equipment does not fulfil the dielectric strength requirement according to Clause 6.3.12 of EN 6007911:2007. Special consideration has to be taken under installation. See Safety Control Drawing no. GL-2513.

2.

The potential electrostatic charging/discharging risk on the horn antenna GLA- 300/H has to be observed
when used with gas group IIC (hydrogen, acetylene and carbon disulphide). If the mounting conditions
imply a minimum distance of 300 mm from socket opening/end and up to the antenna front, the GLA-300/H
assembly with a socket is approved for use in gas group IIC.
Additionally, no charging mechanisms such as dry rubbing or liquid/mist/vapour/gas/air stream directed
towards and no object to touch the antenna front should be allowed while group IIC explosive atmosphere.

Essential Health and Safety Requirements


See item 9

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

Page 1 of 3
PROD 001

[1] EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE


[2] Equipment or Protected System Intended for use
in Potentially explosive atmospheres
Directive 94/9/EC
[3]

EC-Type Examination Certificate Number:

Nemko 09ATEX1128X Issue 1

[4]

Equipment or Protective System:

GLK-300. Associated power and signal unit for level


gauging radar sensor.

[5]
[6]

Applicant/ Manufacturer:
Address:

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Haakon VIIs gt. 4
N-7005 Trondheim, Norway

[7]

This equipment or protective system and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this
certificate and the documents therein referred to.

[8]

Nemko AS, notified body number 0470 in accordance with Article 9 of Council Directive 94/9/EC of 23 March
1994, certifies that this equipment or protective system has been found to comply with the Essential Health and
Safety requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for
use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to the Directive.
The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report no. 206577

[9]

Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with:
CENELEC EN 60079-0: 2006, CENELEC EN 60079-11: 2007 and CENELEC EN 60079-26 : 2004

[10]

If the sign X is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment or protective system is
subject to special conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate.

[11]

This EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE relates only to the design, examination and tests of the
specified equipment or protective system in accordance to the directive 94/9/EC.
Further requirements of the Directive apply to the manufacturing process and supply of this equipment or
protective system. These are not covered by this certificate.

[12] The marking of the equipment or protective system shall include the following:

II (1) G

[Ex ia] IIC Ta: +70C

Oslo, 2012-04-20

Asle Kaastad
Certification Manager, Ex-products

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

Nemko 09ATEX1128X Issue 1

Date: 2012-04-20

Page 2 of 3

[13] Schedule
[14]
[15]

EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE No

Nemko 09ATEX1128X Issue 1

Description of Equipment or Protective System


GLK-300 is an associated apparatus for power supply and communication for level gauging radar sensors and
auxiliary pressure and temperature transmitters.
The power and RS-485 are for connection to the level gauging radar sensor.
Hart circuit for pressure and temperature transmitters. More than one transmitter may be connected to the Hart circuit
so far as the sums of capacitance and inductance of the transmitters and cables are less or equal to the Co and Lo for
GLK-300.
Safety parameters.
Maximum safe voltage Um: 250V AC
Power supply , terminals X2 & X3: p4 - X1& X4: p4
Maximum output voltage.
Maximum output current.
Maximum output power.
Maximum external capacitance.
Maximum external inductance.
Maximum ratio

U O:
I O:
P O:
CO:
LO:
Lo/Ro

14,3V DC
360 mA
2,1W
680nF
42H
17 H/

X1 & X4: p5-p6 (HART)


Maximum output voltage.
Maximum output current.
Maximum output power.
Maximum external capacitance.
Maximum external inductance.

U O:
I O:
P O:
CO:
LO:

25,8V DC
115 mA
0,74W
100nF
1,6mH

X2 & X3: p5- p6 (RS-485)-X1&X4: p4 (0V-ref.)


Maximum output voltage.
UO: 7 V DC
Maximum output current.
I O:
70 mA
Maximum output power.
PO: 88 mW
Maximum external capacitance.
CO: 15,7F
Maximum external inductance.
LO: 7mH
X1, X2, X3 &X4: p1-p3 (0V/ GND)
Range of ambient temperature: -15 C Ta + 70 C

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

Nemko 09ATEX1128X Issue 1

[16]

Date: 2012-04-20

Page 3 of 3

Report No. 206577

Name/Number
GL-2513
E-2693
E-2694
GL-2534
UL RCF1006FR.pdf
BUILDUP GLK-300 9212-459.pdf
PCB_SPEC_GLK-300_9212-459
GL-2464
BUILDUP_ GLK-300_9212-460
PCB_SPEC_GLK-300_9212-460
GL-2465
9212-459.000
9212-460.000
7212-459.000
7212-460.000

Rev.
B
A
A
C
A
B
A
B
B
1
0

Date
2011-03-28
2009-05-28
2009-05-28
2011-11-24
2009-03-05
2001-02-05
2012-01-24
2012-01-23
2001-04-11
2009-05-28
2012-01-23
2012-01-23
2012-01-23
2011-02-07
2009-05-28

Title/Description
Safety Control Drawing and El.con.of GL-300.
Sticker for GLK-300.
Serial number sticker for GLK-300.
Signal Processing Unit GLK-300 (housing).
UL iQ for Plastics.
GLK-300 Main Board, PCB, 8 Layer, 1.6 mm
GLK-300 Main Board, PCB Specifications.
GLK-300 Main Board, Schematics.
GLK-300 Piggyback Board, 4 LAYER, 1.6mm.
GLK-300 Piggyback Board, PCB Specifications.
GLK-300 Piggyback Board, Schematics.
BOM GLK-300 Main board.
BOM GLK-300 piggyback board.
GLK-300 Main Board, PCB Layout Drawings
GLK-300 Piggyback Board, PCB Layout Drawings

Sheets
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
1
2
5
2
10
6

Certificate History and Associated Nemko Reports


Issue
Date
Report
Description
0
2009-08-23 119315
Prime Certificate released
1
2012-04-20 206577
Changes in components which do not affect safety. Revised documents.
[17]

[18]

Special Conditions for Safe Use


1.

The separation distance of minimum 50mm between intrinsically and non-intrinsically safe circuits has to be
observed for the final installation in a cabinet.

2.

The GLK-300 has to be installed in a cabinet with a degree of protection of at least IP20

3.

The ambient temperature range for the GLK-300 is -15C Ta +70C

4.

The power output circuit has a resistive trapezoidal output characteristic with a maximum U1 voltage 23,5V.

5.

The RS-485 circuit has a safety open voltage Uo: 7V with a maximum voltage 5V for load and thermal
assessments.

Essential Health and Safety Requirements


See item 9

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

Page 1 of 5

[1] EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE


[2] Equipment or Protected System Intended for use
in Potentially explosive atmospheres
Directive 94/9/EC
[3]

EC-Type Examination Certificate Number :

Nemko 02ATEX119X Issue 4

[4]

Equipment or Protective System :

Pressure Transmitter

[5]
[6]

Applicant:
Address :

[5]

Manufacturer:
Address:

Kongsberg Maritime AS
N-7005 Trondheim
Haakon VIIs gt. 4
Norway
Kongsberg Maritime AS
N-7005 Trondheim
Norway

[6]
[7]

This equipment or protective system and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this
certificate and the documents therein referred to.

[8]

Nemko AS, notified body number 0470 in accordance with Article 9 of Council Directive 94/9/EC of 23 March
1994, certifies that this equipment or protective system has been found to comply with the Essential Health and
Safety requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for
use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to the Directive.
The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report no. :

[9]

204393

Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with:

CENELEC EN 60079-0 : 2009 and CENELEC EN 60079-11: 2007


[10]

If the sign X is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment or protective system is
subject to special conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate.

[11]

This EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE relates only to the design and construction of the specified
equipment or protected system. If applicable, further requirements of this Directive apply to the manufacturer
and supply of this equipment or protective system.

[12]

The marking of the equipment or protective system shall include the following:

II 1 G

Ex ia IIC T5, Tamb 45C to +85C

Oslo, 2012-06-28

Asle Kaastad
Certification Manager, Ex-products

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

Date: 2012-06-28

Nemko 02ATEX119X Issue 4

Page 2 of 5

[13] Schedule
[14]

[15]

EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE No

Nemko 02ATEX119X Issue 4

Description of Equipment or Protective System

The certificate covers the GT-series Pressure Transmitters mentioned in the table below for conversion of a
pressure into an electrical 4-20mA current loop signal. The pressure transmitters comprise a pressure sensing
element and electronic boards enclosed and encapsulated in a cylindrical metallic enclosure.

Type Designations
Name

Type

Range

Signal
range,
Output
4-20mA,
2-wires with
HART

GT402

Gauge, sealed
gauge,
absolute

Up to
600 bar

GT403

Sealed gauge,
absolute

Up to
600 bar

4-20mA,
2-wires with
HART

GT404

Gauge, sealed
gauge,
absolute

Up to
40 bar

4-20mA,
2-wires with
HART

GT420

Differential

Up to
25 bar

4-20mA
2 wires

GT422

Differential

Up to
25 bar

4-20mA
2 wires

GT423

Differential

Up to
25 bar

4-20mA
2 wires

Material

Connection/design

Body of AISI 316


and wetted parts in
AISI316 and
Titanium
Body and wetted
parts in AISI 316 and
Titanium.

Connection box with lid and cable


gland. Threaded process connection
ISO 228-G1/2A. IP66/67

Body of AISI 316


and wetted parts in
AISI316, Titanium
and Hastelloy
Body of Stainless
Steel and wetted parts
in AISI316
Body of Stainless
Steel and wetted parts
in AISI316
Body of Stainless
Steel and wetted parts
in AISI316

Watertight flanged connection with


PUR cable. Threaded process
connection ISO 228-G1/2A. IP686bar. GT403can have cable up to
60meters of type PUR-cable with
following data:
Maximum internal capacitance:
Ci = 120nF/km
Maximum internal inductance:
Li = 1.7mH/km
Connection box with lid and cable
gland. Flanged process connection
with large diaphragm facing cargo.
IP66/67
Standard DIN power connector.
Threaded process connection ISO
228-G1/2A. IP66
Connection box with lid and cable
gland. Threaded process connection
ISO 228-G1/2A.IP66/67
Watertight flanged connection with
PUR cable. Threaded process
connection ISO 228-G1/2A. IP686bar. GT423 can have cable up to
60meters of type PUR-cable with
following data:
Maximum internal capacitance:
Ci = 120nF/km
Maximum internal inductance:
Li = 1.7mH/km

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

Nemko 02ATEX119X Issue 4

Date: 2012-06-28

Page 3 of 5

Safety Data
Input terminals 1 and 2
Maximum input voltage.
Maximum input current.
Maximum input power.
Maximum internal capacitance.
Maximum internal inductance.

Ui:
Ii:
Pi:
Ci:
Li:

28V
150mA
0,85W
22nF
4H

Certificate History and Associated Nemko Reports


Issue
Date
Report
Description
0
2002-05-27 200206132 Prime Certificate released
1
2005-12-12 55474
Various technical changes and changes of documentation
2
2010-06-08 134876
Various technical changes and changes of documentation.
3
2011-07-11 180570
Descriptive documents updated.
4
2012-06-28
204393
Update to new standards EN 60079-0: 2009, EN 60079-11: 2007 and three new variants
models GT420, GT422 and GT423

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

Nemko 02ATEX119X Issue 4

Date: 2012-06-28

Page 4 of 5

Descriptive Documents
Title
Lasertagging GT40-/-- Detail drawing

Number
E-2635

Rev.
F

Date
19.04.2012

Pressure transmitters type series GT400/- Installation in


hazardous area external connection diagram

GT-1311

19.04.2012

Pressure transmitters type GT402---- Dimensional sketch

GT-1312

19.04.2012

Pressure transmitters type GT403---- Dimensional sketch

GT-1313

19.04.2012

Pressure transmitters type GT404---- Dimensional sketch

GT-1314

19.04.2012

Pressure transmitter GT402 Assembly drawing

GT-1316

19.04.2012

Pressure transmitter type GT403AISI 316 og titan gr. 2


Assembly drawing

GT-1317

19.04.2012

Bill of Materials for GTB-18

GTB-18

04.02.2005

Bill of Materials for GTB-19

GTB-19

14.06.2005

Bill of Materials for GTB-20

GTB-20

09.02.2005

Connection drawing GTB-20

GT-1331

19.04.2012

Pressure transmitter type GT404 Assembly drawing


GTB-17
GTB-17
GTB-16
GTB-16
Materialliste
Materialliste
GTB-19 side B (PCB assembly drawing)
GTB-18 side B (PCB assembly drawing)
GTB-18 side A (PCB assembly drawing)
GTB-19 side A (PCB assembly drawing)
PCB utlegg GTB-20 (GTB-18 /GTB-19)
PCB utlegg GTB-20 (GTB-18 /GTB-19)
Skjema GTB-18
PCB specification GTB-20
Pressure transmitters type GT420---- Dimensional sketch
Pressure transmitters type GT422---- Dimensional sketch
Pressure transmitters type GT423---- Dimensional sketch
Pressure transmitters type GT420---- Assembly drawing
Pressure transmitters type GT422---- Assembly drawing
Pressure transmitters type GT423---- Assembly drawing
Schematic drawing
Bill of materials
Schematic drawing
Bill of materials
PCB specification GTB-23
Instructions GT420, GT422, GT423
Instructions GT403
Instructions GT402
Instructions GT404

GT-1373
7212-322.007
7212-322.107
7212-312.007
7212-312.107
9212-312.0001 GTB-16
9212-312.0001 GTB-17
7212-361.007
7212-360.007
7212-360.107
7212-361.107
7212-360.003
7212-361.003
GT-1286
GTB-20_SPC
GT-2102
GT-2103
GT-2104
GT-2105
GT-2106
GT-2107
GT-2110
7212-360.911
GT-1287
7212-361.901
7212-360.900
P-GT42X/CE
P-GT403/CE
P-GT402/CE
P-GT404/CE

D
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
7
7
4
7
4
4
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
E
A
A
B
N
N
J

02.02.2011
1998-04-22
1998-06-26
1998-03-18
1998-06-24
1999-04-20
1999-04-20
05.07.2007
27.01.2006
27.01.2006
27.01.2006
27.01.2006
27.01.2006
2004-11-04
18.03.2011
19.04.2012
19.04.2012
19.04.2012
19.04.2012
19.04.2012
19.04.2012
09.05.2012
09.05.2012
05.07.2007
09.05.2012
11.06.2012
27.06.2012
27.06.2012
22.06.2012
22.06.2012

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

Nemko 02ATEX119X Issue 4

[16]

Report No 204393

[17]

Special Conditions for Safe Use

1.
2.
3.

[18]

Date: 2012-06-28

Page 5 of 5

The stated input values Ui, Ii, Pi are to be regarded as individual maximum values. It is a precondition that
the diode safety barrier in the supply circuit has a linear resistive output characteristic.
When installing titanium sensors special caution must be taken to avoid ignition hazard due to impact or
friction.
GT403 and GT423 are delivered with a cable end up 60meters of type PUR-cable with up to 102H
inductance and up to 7,2nF capacitance. The inductance and capacitance of the cable length the comes with
the transmitter shall be added to Li:4H and Ci:22nF of the transmitter listed on page 3 under Safety Data. .

Essential Health and Safety Requirements


See item 9

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

Page 1 of 4
PROD 001

[1] EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE


[2] Equipment or Protected System Intended for use
in Potentially explosive atmospheres
Directive 94/9/EC
[3]

EC-Type Examination Certificate Number:

Nemko 09ATEX1133X Issue 2

[4]
[5]
[6]

Equipment or Protective System:


Applicant/ Manufacturer:
Address:

GC-300 Cargo Temperature Transmitters


Kongsberg Maritime AS
Haakon VIIs gt. 4
N-7005 Trondheim, Norway

[7]

This equipment or protective system and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this
certificate and the documents therein referred to.

[8]

Nemko AS, notified body number 0470 in accordance with Article 9 of Council Directive 94/9/EC of 23 March
1994, certifies that this equipment or protective system has been found to comply with the Essential Health and
Safety requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for
use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to the Directive.
The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report no. 192397

[9]

Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with:
EN 60079-0: 2009, EN 60079-11: 2007 and EN 60079-26: 2004

[10]

If the sign X is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment or protective system is
subject to special conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate.

[11]

This EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE relates only to the design, examination and tests of the
specified equipment or protective system in accordance to the directive 94/9/EC.
Further requirements of the Directive apply to the manufacturing process and supply of this equipment or
protective system. These are not covered by this certificate.

[12] The marking of the equipment or protective system shall include the following:

II 1 G

Ex ia IIC T4 Ta: -45C Ta +85C

Oslo, 2013-06-07
This is a revised version of certificate dated 2013-04-25. Descriptive documents list and Issue 1 date corrected.

Asle Kaastad
Certification Manager, Ex-products

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

Nemko 09ATEX1133X Issue 2

Date: 2013-06-07

Page 2 of 4

[13] Schedule
[14]
[15]

EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE No

Nemko 09ATEX1133X Issue 2

Description of Equipment or Protective System


The GC-300 is a triple input Pt100 or Pt1000 temperature transmitter with Hart output, primarily intended for use on
cargo tanks. The transmitter is placed in a stainless steel enclosure and shall be supplied from a barrier with the
appropriate safety parameters. The GC-306 are six input Pt100, Pt500 or Pt1000 temperature transmitter with Hart
output, primarily intended for use on cargo tanks onboard i.e. oil- , product- and chemical tankers. GC-306 is supplied
from a barrier with the appropriate safety parameters.
Type Designations
GC-300
Safety parameters.
Terminals X4. P1, p2 (HART)
Maximum input voltage.
Maximum input current.
Maximum input power.
Maximum internal capacitance.
Maximum internal inductance.

Ui:
Ii:
Pi:
Ci :
Li:

28V DC
160mA
850mW
10nF
Negligible

U o:
I o:
P o:
Co:
Lo:

28V DC
52mA
0,36W
83nF
15mH

Terminals X1, X2 & X3. P1, p2, p3, p4


Maximum output voltage.
Maximum output current.
Maximum output power.
Maximum external capacitance.
Maximum external inductance.
Type Designations
GC-306
Safety parameters.
Terminals X8. P1, p2 (HART)
Maximum input voltage.
Ui:
28V DC
Maximum input current.
Ii:
160mA
Maximum input power.
Pi:
850mW
Maximum internal capacitance.
Ci : 19nF
Maximum internal inductance.
Li:
Negligible
Terminals X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 & X6. P1, p2, p3, p4, p5, p6

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

Nemko 09ATEX1133X Issue 2


Maximum output voltage.
Maximum output current.
Maximum output power.
Maximum external capacitance.
Maximum external inductance.

[16]

U o:
I o:
P o:
Co:
Lo:

Date: 2013-06-07

Page 3 of 4

28V DC
60mA
0,42W
83nF
15mH

Report No. 192397


Certificate History and Associated Nemko Reports
Issue
0
1
2

Date
2009-06-23
2013-04-23
2013-04-25

Report
119316
206578
192397

Description
Prime Certificate released
Minor change which do not affect safety. Revised documents.
Adding two variant types GC-300 (electronic board GCB-303) & GC-306
(electronic board GCB-306). The new el.board GCB-303 will supersedes
the old board of GCB-300 for type GC-300.

Descriptive Documents
Name/Number

Rev.

E-2692

Date
(yyyy-mm-dd)
17.12.2012

GCB-303_7212-475EtchLayers
GC-228
7212-475.901
GC-217

11.10.2012

A
A
E

11.10.2012
11.10.2012
23.11.2012

GC-218

03.08.2011

7212-475.900
Buildup 04 Layer Standard
GL-2513
GC-225
E-2719
GCB-306_7212-474EtchLayer
GC-227
7212-474.901
368251

A
C
B
A
0000

11.10.2012
11.04.2001
12.11.2012
22.11.2012
02.01.2013
12.10.2012

A
A
A

12.10.2012
17.12.2012
19.12.2012

368252

19.12.2012

7212-474.900
BuildUP_6layer_GCB-306

A
-

12.10.2012
13.09.2012

Title/Description

Sheets

Laser tagging for termperature transmitter


type GC-300
PCB layout

Circuit diagram
Bill of material
GC-300 connection box for temperature.
Assembly drawing.
GC-300 Temperature transmitter box.
Dimensional sketch.
PCB specification
PCB Build up
Safety control drawing
GCB-300 Potted.
Label for temperature transmitter type GC-306
PCB Layout

1
3
1

Circuit diagram
Bill of materials
GC-306 connection box for temperature.
Assembly drawing.
GC-306 Temperature transmitter box.
Dimensional sketch.
PCB specification
PCB build up

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

1
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
4
1
1
1
1

Nemko 09ATEX1133X Issue 2


380109
[17]

14.01.2013

Date: 2013-06-07

Safety control drawing

Page 4 of 4
1

Special Conditions for Safe Use


Model GC-306 is made without a complete enclosure and has to be installed in an enclosure that satisfies the
following clauses:
-

The degree of protection of minimum IP54 according to IEC 60529 for outdoor mounting.

Complies with Material composition requirements in EN 60079-0, clause 8.1 for EPL Ga;
Materials used in the construction of enclosures of Group II electrical equipment for the
identified equipment protection levels shall not contain, by mass, more than:
10 % in total of aluminium, magnesium, titanium and zirconium, and
7,5 % in total of magnesium, titanium and zirconium.

[18]

The need for equipotential connection of the metal enclosure shall be observed.

Essential Health and Safety Requirements


See item 9

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address:
P.O.Box 73 Blindern
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address:
Gaustadallen 30
0373 OSLO

Telephone:
+47 22 96 03 30
Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number:
NO 974404532

You might also like